Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
M6
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M6.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M6's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW M6 throughout an extended ser-
vice life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/09, 09 09 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 230.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
43 Adjusting
52 Transporting children safely
55 Driving
65 Controls Overview
75 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
89 Lamps
94 Climate
100 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
108 Things to remember when driving
112 BMW M6 Engineering
Navigation
116 Navigation system
117 Destination entry
126 Destination guidance
132 What to do if…
Entertainment
136 On/off and tone
139 Radio
142 Satellite radio
144 CD/DVD player and CD changer
151 Music collection
156 External devices
Communications
162 Telephone
174 Contacts
176 BMW Assist
Mobility
184 Refueling
186 Wheels and tires
192 Under the hood
197 Maintenance
199 Care
203 Replacing components
212 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
220 Technical data
224 Short commands of voice activation
system
230 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be happy to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech-
nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet avail-
able at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
These sections contain information on using
the voice activation system.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes all equipment offered for the
BMW M6.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-
responding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Notes
6
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment
such as CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or the
like may cause extensive damage to the vehicle,
compromise its safety, interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system, or affect the validity of
the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW
center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment.
The section will also assist you in becoming
acquainted with the control concepts
and options available for operating
the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing rear
window 37
2 Convertible: opening and closing windows
together 37
3 Convertible: opening and closing rear
windows 36
4 Opening and closing front windows 36
5 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
49
6 Adjusting exterior mirrors 49
Automatic curb monitor 49
7
Turn signals 61
High beams, headlamp flasher 91
High-beam Assistant
*
91
Parking lamps
*
91
Check Control 70
Computer 66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8 Shift paddles 59
9 Buttons on steering wheel
10 Instrument cluster 12
13 Ignition lock 55
14 Horn, entire surface
17 Releasing hood 192
Mobile phone
*
162:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing
*
of
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system
*
22
Changing radio station 139
Selecting music track 144
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
MDrive, call up individual
settings 50
Changing entertainment source
11
Windshield wipers 62
Rain sensor 62
12
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 55
15
Steering wheel heater
*
50
Steering wheel adjustment 50
16
Cruise control 63
18
Opening luggage compartment
lid 31
19
Head-up Display
*
86
20
Parking lamps 89
Low beams 89
Welcome lamps 89
Automatic headlamp control 89
Daytime running lamps
*
90
Welcome lamps 89
Adaptive Light Control
*
90
High-beam Assistant
*
91
21
Instrument lighting 93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 65
5 Engine oil thermometer 66
6 Display for
> Computer 66
Engine oil level 194
> Indicator and warning lamps 71
> Speed of cruise control 64
7 Display for
> Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 59
> Engine oil level for manual
transmission 194
> Check Control message present 71
> Odometer and trip odometer 65
> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 68
> High-beam Assistant
*
91
8 Fuel gauge 66
9 Resetting trip odometer 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause and
elimination of a malfunction, can be opened via
the Check Control system, refer to page 70.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps signal particular
functions:
Parking lamps/low beams 89
High beams/headlamp flasher 91
Parking brake applied 57
Parking brake applied for Canadian
models
Lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive and braking
forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 76
MDrive 50
M Dynamic Mode 77
Exhaust-gas values 198
Exhaust-gas values for Canadian
models 198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for hands-free mode for tele-
phone
*
and voice activation system
*
22
Convertible: microphone on steering col-
umn
2 Reading lamps 93
3 SOS: initiating
an emergency request 212
4 Interior lamps 93
5 Passenger airbag status lamp 84
6 Control Display 16
7 Hazard warning flashers
8 Central locking system 30
9 Automatic climate control 94
10 CD/DVD drive 136
11 Programmable memory buttons 20
12 Switching entertainment sound output on/
off and adjusting volume 136
13 Changing
> radio station 139
> track 136
14 Ejecting CD/DVD 144
16 Bracket for cupholder
*
103
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Buttons on the controller 17
Selecting menus directly
19 Drivelogic of Sequential Manual
Transmission 59
20 EDC Electronic Damper Control for
Sequential Manual Transmission 79
21 DSC Dynamic Stability Control for Sequen-
tial Manual Transmission 76
22 M Engine Dynamic Control POWER for
Sequential Manual Transmission 60
23 EDC Electronic Damper Control for manual
transmission
*
79
24 MDM
> M Dynamic Mode for manual
transmission
*
76
> Switching DSC on and off in manual
transmission
*
77
Temperature setting, left/right 95
Automatic air distribution and
volume 95
Cooling function 96
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode 96
Maximum cooling 96
Residual heat mode 97
Switching off automatic climate
control 97
Air volume 96
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 96
Rear window defroster 96
15
Heated seats 48
PDC Park Distance Control
*
75
Flat Tire Monitor 79
Convertible: opening the convert-
ible top 38
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func-
tions is described in connection with the rele-
vant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Call up a menu directly, arrow 3
> Move in four directions, arrows 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Press, arrow 6
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Basic operation
From radio readiness, refer to page 55, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is hidden after approx. 10 sec-
onds.
Opens the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Buttons on the controller Function
MENU Opens the main menu
RADIO Opens the Radio menu
CD Opens CD/Multimedia
NAV Opens the Navigation menu
TEL Opens the Telephone menu
BACK Opens the previous menu
OPTION Opens the Options menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opens the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional option: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or set-
tings can be selected that are currently not vis-
ible.<
An example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
1 Time
2 Display for:
> Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS
*
received
> Phone book
*
loading
> Roaming
*
active
3 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices
> Phone book
*
:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4 Sound output is switched off or
traffic bulletin display
*
:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
inputs via the voice activation system
*
.
Switching the control display
on/off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off display"
To switch on, press the controller.
Split screen
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g. information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Selecting the display for the split
screen content
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.
Programmable memory
buttons
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory keys and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired button
longer than 2 seconds.
Example for programmable memory
keys
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. ... Press the desired button
longer than 2 seconds.
Executing a function
... Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying button assignment
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
Displaying short info
... Touch the button.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the button longer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
Town/city names can be entered with the spell-
ing used in any of the languages available on the
Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete one letter
or number
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice activation system includes a special
microphone.
The microphone is located:
> Near the interior rearview mirror in the
Coupe, refer to page 14
> On the steering column in the Convertible
Precondition
Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the
voice activation system in order to enable iden-
tification of the spoken commands. To set the
language of iDrive, refer to page 73.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
activation system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis-
play.
To have the possible commands read aloud:
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com-
mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 224.
An example: selecting the track of a CD
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbrevi-
ated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
Notes
To operate the phone by voice, refer to
page 169.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies
when spelling out and saying a full word
during destination entry.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and convertible
top closed to prevent interference from
ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
{Voice commands}
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{CD track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-
ment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a
longer distance with each remote control at
least twice a year to keep the battery charged.
For Comfort Access
*
, the remote control con-
tains a replaceable battery, refer to page 35.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are activated and executed in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Information on the required for maintenance is
also stored in the remote control, refer to Ser-
vice data in remote control, page 197.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Hotel function, refer to page 31
> Driver's door, refer to page 29
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 31
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key of the remote
control fit the same locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
27
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls,
for two with Comfort Access
*
.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 28
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
> Displays on Control Display:
> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 70
> Date format, refer to page 70
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 74
> Units of measure for consumption,
route/distances, temperature and pres-
sure, refer to page 68
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 73
> Lighting settings:
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 61
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 89
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 90
> Daytime running lamps
*
, refer to
page 90
> High-beam Assistant
*
, refer to page 91
> Drivelogic driving program in the Sequential
mode, refer to page 59
> Individual settings for MDrive, refer to
page 50
> PDC Park Distance Control
*
: optical warn-
ing, refer to page 75
> Head-up Display
*
: selection and brightness
of display, refer to page 86
> Automatic climate control: for AUTO pro-
gram and intensity, cooling function, and
automatic recirculated air control/recircu-
lated air mode, temperature, air distribution,
temperature in the upper body region, refer
to page 95
> Navigation system
*
: voice instructions for
destination guidance, refer to page 127
In addition, the following, most recently
selected settings are recalled during unlocking:
> Programmable memory buttons: selecting
stored functions, refer to page 20
> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering-
wheel position, refer to page 45
> Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 136
> Radio: display of stored stations, refer to
page 141
> Phone: adjusting volume, refer to page 165
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Compartment in the front center console
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using door lock
> With Comfort Access
*
via the door handles
These actions operate the anti-theft system
*
at
the same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy
lamps
*
are also switched on and off with the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
remote control. The alarm system
is armed/dis-
armed at the same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 33.
Operating from inside
Via the central locking button, refer to page 30.
The fuel filler flap and the compartment in the
front center console are not locked, refer to
page 30.
In the event of a serious accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically. In addi-
tion, the hazard warning flashers and interior
lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
, and
the welcome lamps are switched on.
Setting unlocking behavior
You can set whether the first press of the button
unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehi-
cle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Pressing the button once unlocks the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks the
driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
Pressing the button twice unlocks the
entire vehicle.
> "Comfort opening", refer to page 28
5. Press the controller.
Convenient opening mode
Press and hold the button:
> Coupe: the windows are opened.
> Convertible: the windows and the convert-
ible top are opened.
Watch the convertible top during the
opening process to be sure that no
one is injured. Releasing the button stops
the operation.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan-
ger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off alarm: press any button.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-
less of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
A previously locked luggage compart-
ment lid is also locked again after closing.
Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure that
adequate clearance is available before open-
ing.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi-
cle is switched on.
Malfunction
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 26.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap.
2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas-
senger door and luggage compartment lid.
Convenient opening and closing
You also have the option of operating the win-
dows and the convertible top on the Convertible
from the driver's door lock.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Keep a close eye on the closing process
and also on the opening process of the
convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti-
vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks again
after a short time if no door has been
opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you start to drive.
4. Press the controller.
Automatic locking is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock both doors at the same time
with the button for the central locking sys-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
tem and then pull the door handle above the
armrest or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock both
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Hotel function
The hotel function locks the compartment in
the front center console and the luggage com-
partment lid separately and disconnects them
from the central locking system. If you hand
over the remote control without the integrated
key, refer to page 26, e.g. at a hotel, then this
prevents access to the luggage compartment
and to the compartment in the front center con-
sole.
Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,
until the key slot points in the direction of travel
and then remove:
The hotel function is activated after subsequent
locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system
locks the luggage compartment lid and the
compartment in the front center console and
disconnects them from the central locking sys-
tem.
Unlocking manually
In order to manually unlock the compartment in
the front center console in the event of an elec-
trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the
right until it reaches the stop.
If unlocking was manual, return the lock to
the home position, i.e. all the way back to
the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Luggage compartment lid
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
that adequate clearance is available before
opening.<
Opening from inside
Press the button:
The luggage compartment lid opens, provided
that it is not locked or the hotel function is not
activated, refer to the above section.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Opening from outside
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or
press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
Convertible: if the convertible top is not
completely open or closed, then the lug-
gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer
to page 38.<
Unlocking manually
The luggage compartment lid lock is located
under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to
page 26, fit the luggage-compartment lid lock.
Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to open the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent
this, you should deactivate the alarm before-
hand.
If the alarm is inadvertently triggered: switch off
the alarm, refer to page 33.<
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear; other-
wise, injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo area. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Luggage compartment
There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners
of the luggage compartment for securing lug-
gage nets
*
or securing straps to fix luggage in
position.
Also refer to Securing cargo, page 111.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible: increasing luggage
compartment capacity
With the convertible top closed, you can
increase the luggage compartment capacity:
To do so, unfold the handle and press it down-
ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.
This moves the convertible top compartment
floor into the raised position.
Before opening the convertible top, carry out
this procedure in reverse order.
The convertible top cannot be opened if
the convertible top compartment floor is
in the raised position.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the
luggage compartment lid
> To movements in the vehicle interior: inte-
rior motion sensor, refer to page 34
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid,
even with the system armed, by using the
button of the remote control, refer to
page 29. When the luggage compartment lid is
closed, it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 28, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp below the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. However, the interior motion
sensor is not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe:
The condition for proper operation of the inte-
rior motion sensor is closed windows.
Convertible:
Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat
cushions. This means that the alarm system,
including the interior motion sensor, is armed
even if the convertible top is open. Falling
objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,
refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In two-level garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access*
Comfort Access allows you to access your vehi-
cle without having to hold the remote control in
your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote
control with you, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The
vehicle automatically detects the associated
remote control in the immediate vicinity or in
the interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Convenient closing with Coupe
> Opening luggage compartment lid sepa-
rately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked if the vehicle detects that
the remote control you are carrying is out-
side the vehicle.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the Comfort Access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 26
beforehand.
The special features when using Comfort
Access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the convertible
top, the system is checking whether a remote
control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat
opening or closing if necessary.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Unlocking
Grasp a door handle fully, refer to arrow 1, but
do not touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3 when
doing so. This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Locking
> On the driver's door, touch the highlighted
surface, arrow 2, with a finger for approx.
1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.
> On the front passenger door, touch the
highlighted surface, arrow 3, with the back
of your hand for approx. 1 second, but do
not grasp the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
electronic systems/consumers are
switched off before locking to save the bat-
tery.<
Coupe: Convenient closing
Hold a finger or the back of your hand against
the surface, arrow 2 or 3, but do not grasp the
door handle while doing so.
The windows are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem. This
corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment is detected inside
the locked vehicle after the luggage compart-
ment lid has been closed, then the luggage
compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn-
ing flashers flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch
on the radio readiness, refer to page 55.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will
start immediately.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected, it is only possible to
restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds
after it is switched off.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then
open or close the vehicle with the buttons on
the remote control or with a key. To start the
engine following this, insert the remote control
in the ignition lock.
When unlocking or locking/Convenient closing
do not simultaneously grasp the door handle
and touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3. Other-
wise, you may limit the function.
Replacing battery
If the battery of the remote control is dead, a
message will appear in the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 26.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Coupe: Opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: Opening, closing
To close the side windows while the vehi-
cle is being driven, always close the rear
windows first or all four windows simulta-
neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close
tightly at higher speeds.<
Individually
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Together
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
All windows, including the rear window,
continue to open as long as you press
the switch.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the opening
movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
Rear window
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
The rear window continues to open for
as long as you hold down the switch.
You can close the rear window in the
same manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The rear window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
opening movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
The rear window opens and closes auto-
matically when you open or close the con-
vertible top.<
For information on using the Convenient open-
ing and closing mode at the door lock or with
the remote control, refer to page 28 or 30.
Coupe: For information on Convenient closing
with Comfort Access, refer to page 35.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.
Convertible: the rear side windows and rear
window are not equipped with a pinch protec-
tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win-
dows and the rear window during closing, oth-
erwise injuries can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Convertible: Top
The fully automatic convertible top combines
secure weather protection with simple and
easy-to-use operation.
Here are a few tips for getting the maximum
pleasure from your Convertible:
> It is advisable to close the convertible top
when the vehicle is parked. The closed con-
vertible top not only protects the passenger
compartment from unforeseen weather
damage, it also provides a certain amount of
protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if
the convertible top is closed, only keep
valuables in the locked luggage compart-
ment.
> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the
convertible top.
In order to avoid damage, do not move the
convertible top at temperatures below
+147/–106.
Do not leave the convertible top in its storage
compartment for longer than one day when wet;
otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top;
otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these
objects could fall off and lead to damage or
injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is raised.
Driving without having completed the opening
or closing action can lead to damage or injury.
Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur-
ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil-
dren away from the travel path of the convert-
ible top.
For safety reasons, do not move the convertible
top unless the vehicle is stationary.<
If you have initiated top movement with
the vehicle at a stop and then start to
drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the
initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/
30 km/h:
To do so, press and hold the corresponding
button.<
Partial vacuums that occur at higher
speeds in the passenger compartment
can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto-
matic climate control to increase the air volume
so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not
occur.<
Prior to opening and closing
> Observe the safety precautions above.
> Ensure that the convertible top compart-
ment floor in the luggage compartment is
folded down, refer to page 33, as otherwise
the convertible top cannot be opened.
> Make sure that the luggage compartment
lid is closed.
Opening and closing
From radio readiness, refer to page 55, with the
vehicle stationary:
To avoid putting excessive strain on the
battery, only move the convertible top
when the engine is running if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove for-
eign objects from the windshield frame, as
these might inhibit closing of the convertible
top.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 To close, press and hold the button until the
process is complete
2 LED
3 To open, press and hold the button until the
process is complete
When the button for operating the con-
vertible top is pressed, the side windows
move down all the way and the rear window is
lowered completely.
If the convertible top is not completely open or
closed, then the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened.<
LED
In the following situations, in addition to the
LED, a message appears in the Control Display
and an acoustic signal may sound:
> During convertible top operation, the LED
lights up green. It goes out as soon as the
opening or closing action is finished.
> If the LED flashes red when you release the
button, the opening or closing action has
not yet finished.
> If the LED lights up red when the button is
pressed, either the convertible top com-
partment floor in the luggage compartment
is in the raised position or a malfunction has
occurred. The convertible top cannot be
moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for top operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pressing the appropri-
ate button.
If the opening or closing action is interrupted for
a longer period, the convertible top remains in
that position for approx. 15 minutes before it
slowly moves to a stable position.
A convertible top which is not completely
opened or closed presents a danger.
Do not interrupt and continue the closing action
several times in succession; otherwise, the top
mechanism can be damaged.<
If the convertible top is not completely
open or closed, then the luggage com-
partment lid cannot be opened.<
Convenient opening and closing with
remote control and via door lock
Refer to pages 28 and 30.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
absolutely necessary; never open it man-
ually. The convertible top compartment lid can-
not be locked in the event of an electrical mal-
function and would open while the vehicle is
being driven.
Improper handling can lead to damage.<
Before closing
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver
from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 203.
3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com-
partment with the screwdriver and then pull
firmly. This unlocks the convertible top
compartment lid.
4. Close luggage compartment lid.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
During manual convertible top opera-
tion, the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened.<
5. Completely open the side windows and the
rear window.
If the rear window cannot be opened using
the switch, it must be lowered manually.
Opening rear window manually
1. Pry out the cover between the rear head
restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver
as close as possible to the locking ele-
ments, as shown in the illustration.
2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible
into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow until the rear
window is completely open.
Closing
Perform the following work steps with the
assistance of a second person and with
the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to
the convertible top can occur.<
1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the
side panel forward. Reach into the resulting
openings and raise the convertible top
compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.
2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and
right side frame, arrow 3.
Only lift out the top by the side frame,
otherwise the top may be damaged.<
3. Together with the other person, pull the two
sides of the convertible top out simulta-
neously and pivot forward. When doing so,
keep the convertible top compartment lid
open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.
Do not carry out the next operation,
raising top ends, until the top has
been swung forward, otherwise damage
can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as
possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top compartment lid, arrow 6.
5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert-
ible top compartment lid.
6. From the interior, take out the cover in the
center of the front top frame; use a screw-
driver if necessary.
7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening
provided.
8. From the outside, both persons pull the
front frame of the convertible top down-
ward, as simultaneously as possible on the
two sides.
9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the
arrow until the front convertible top frame is
locked to the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top ends are automati-
cally pressed onto the convertible top com-
partment lid and close tightly with tension.
10. If necessary, close the rear window again
manually in the same way as above.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps the air movement in
the passenger compartment to a minimum
when the convertible top is open, thus enabling
pleasant driving even at higher speeds.
The wind deflector is stowed in a protective
sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short
instructions for use are also provided on the
protective sleeve.
Before installing
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to
arrows 1.
2. Press the upper and lower section together
until the locking device engages, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.
4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Installing
1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-
tor into the appropriate opening on the right
side of the vehicle.
2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta-
cles provided.
3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into
the appropriate opening until it snaps into
place.
4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec-
tor.
With wind deflector fitted: do not incline
the front seat backrests too far backward
if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi-
tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam-
aged.<
Removing
The same as installing, but in reverse order.
Folding up
1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the
wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle
all the way back and release the locking
mechanism.
2. Fold in the upper and lower section.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the sitting position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the fol-
lowing section.
For additional information on Transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 52.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
knee and front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbags, otherwise injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 83.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 46.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats that are each
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across
the neck, rub against sharp edges, be routed
over solid or breakable objects or be pinched.
Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Otherwise the belt can slip
over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact
and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing
that prevents the belt from fitting properly and
pull the belt in the upper body area periodically
to readjust the tension, in order to avoid a
reduction in the restraint of the safety belt.<
Safety belts refer to page 48.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement and the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
44
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-
vided by the belt.<
Please follow the instructions on damage to
safety belts provided on page 48 and the infor-
mation on the active front head restraints on
page 46.
Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,
do not incline the front seat backrests too
far backward if the seat is to be moved back to
the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector
will be damaged.<
Adjusting seat
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
1 Angle
2 Longitudinal direction
3 Height
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints, refer to
page 47
6 Coupe: Backrest width
7 Lumbar support
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contours of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature:
press front or rear section of switch.
> Move curvature up or down:
press upper or lowers section of switch.
Thigh support
You can also adjust the thigh support manually:
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and select three different adjust-
ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir-
rors and steering wheel.
The adjustments of the lumbar support and the
backrest width are not stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 55.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the mem-
ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 55.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,
2 or 3.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel
is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for
the steering wheel adjustment in any direction,
refer to page 50.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition
on or off, refer to page 55.
2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Requesting with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, external
rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote key currently in use.
You can select
*
when the position is requested.
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door. In the
Convertible, only this function is used.
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
46
The function for automatically calling up
the last seat position is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching off automatic call-up
Deactivate "Last seat position auto.".
Front head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approximately at ear level. Otherwise
there is increased danger of injury in the event
of an accident.Only remove the head restraints
if no one will be sitting on the seat in question.
Reinstall the head restraints before transport-
ing passengers, as otherwise the head restraint
cannot provide its protective function.<
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Other-
wise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injury-
reducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have
this work carried out by a BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Otherwise, this safety equipment will
not function properly.<
Please contact a BMW center if you wish
to have the front head restraints removed
and installed.<
Coupe
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.
> To lower: slide the head restraint down-
ward.
To reach the lowest position, press the
button, refer to arrow 1.<
Front seats: adjusting distance to the
back of the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: push the button and slide the head-
rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible
Adjusting height
Move the switch up or down.
Front seats: adjusting distance to the
back of the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: push the button and slide the head-
rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Entering rear
Before starting to drive, fold backrests
back, otherwise there is the danger of
accident due to an unexpected movement of
the seat.<
Coupe: releasing backrest
Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for-
ward.
The lever is designed so that the safety belt can
be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten
the safety belt more conveniently.
Convertible: releasing backrest
The belt system integrated in the seat makes it
easier to get in back.
1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for-
ward.
2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has
moved into the desired position.
3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold
the backrest back and lock it in place.
4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has
moved back into its previous position. If you
release button 3 before this, the seat stops
in its current position.
You can lock the backrest in place when it
is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-
ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is
parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi-
bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not
need to use lever 1 to release it.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
Lock backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when the backrest is not
locked. At the same time, a message is
shown on the Control Display.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in
the correct position for adults of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 43.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. A message also appears on
the Control Display. Please check
whether safety belts are being worn correctly.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
When subjected to strain due to an acci-
dent or in the event of damage, replace
the safety belts, the belt tensioners, and any
child restraint systems and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise cor-
rect operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Heated seats
The temperature setting advances one step in
its control sequence each time you press the
button. The highest temperature is set when
three LEDs are lit.
The temperature is reduced and if need be, the
heating is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To switch off:
Press the button longer.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 45.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors
in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in
car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir-
rors that have been manually folded in back into
the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in
are folded out automatically at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated whenever the
engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Tilting down passenger-side mirror –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or move selector lever into
position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror, one on the front and
one on the back.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,
page 45.
Easy entry/exit
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is operating,
the LED in the button lights up.
MDrive
With MDrive you can configure several individ-
ual settings for your vehicle on the Control Dis-
play and activate them simultaneously with the
button on the steering wheel.
Configuring settings
With the ignition switched on you can change
the settings of MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive"
The functions contained in MDrive are dis-
played:
> "Drivelogic:"
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drivelogic: shifting modes and Drivel-
ogic driving programs, refer to page 59
> "EDC:"
Programs of the Electronic Damping
Control, refer to page 79
> "DSC:"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 76
> "POWER:"
Programs of the M Engine Dynamics
Control, refer to page 60
> "Head-Up display"
*
Views of the Head-up Display, refer to
page 86
You can reset all settings for MDrive to the
default values:
3. Select the desired function.
4. Press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to select the desired set-
ting.
6. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating settings
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The settings made on
the Control Display for the functions
contained in MDrive are active.
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after the but-
ton was pressed, MDrive was unable to
respond because the ABS Antilock Brake Sys-
tem or DSC Dynamic Stability Control are cur-
rently regulating driving stability. Press the
button again when the indicator lamp no
longer flashes.<
Even with MDrive activated, you can change
individual settings outside MDrive, e.g. with the
buttons in the center console. To reactivate all
settings made for MDrive on the Control Dis-
play: press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
52
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-
tems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are deployed, even with a
child restraint system. Before installing a child
restraint system, move the front passenger seat
as far back and up as possible to obtain the best
possible position for the belt. Do not change the
seat position after this.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 84.
Installing child restraint
systems
Follow child restraint system manufac-
turer's instructions for the selection,
installation and use of child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer
may be reduced.<
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, the backrest
width adjustment must be completely open.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to the fully open
position, refer to page 44.
2. Install child seat.
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to retract and pull
taut against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to retract com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for Chil-
dren.
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint systems in order not to
impair their protective function.<
Anchor points for LATCH mounts
Before attaching the LATCH child seat, pull the
belt away from the region of the child restraint
fixing system.
Make sure that both of the lower LATCH
mounts have properly clicked into place
and that the child restraint system is resting
snugly against the backrest. Otherwise, the
protective action may be impeded.
<
Rear seats
The mounting points for the LATCH anchors
are located at the positions indicated by arrows
in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Upper LATCH retaining strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only
The following statement is required by Trans-
port Canada:
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir-
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
Coupe
Only use the top tether-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
otherwise the mounting points could be dam-
aged.<
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Placement of tether strap
Make sure that the tether strap is not
routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the upper mounting point;
otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the
child restraint system in the event of an acci-
dent.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraints
3 Tether strap hook
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf
6 Backrest
7 Tether strap of child restraint system
Before usage, fold the the head restraint
*
and if
necessary the mounting points into their raised
position.
1. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
2. Guide the tether strap over the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the mount-
ing point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on.
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation.
Comfort Access*
With Comfort Access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 34.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Manual transmission: the engine starts
when you depress the clutch while press-
ing the Start/Stop button.
Sequential Manual Transmission: the engine
starts when you press the Start/Stop button
with the brake depressed and the selector lever
in position P or N.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The last information of the com-
puter selected is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with Comfort Access
*
by touching the sur-
face on the door handle, refer to Locking on
page 35
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 65.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
56
Radio readiness and ignition switched
off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, shift into neutral
*
or move the selector
lever into position N and firmly apply the park-
ing brake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to
roll.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
Manual transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort
Access in vehicle, refer to page 34.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
idling position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort
Access in vehicle, refer to page 34.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Place selector lever in position N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If the engine does not start, shift back to
the last selector lever position selected,
refer to the instrument cluster display or the
selector lever. Then select position N.
You cannot start off with the hood open.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the sys-
tem design.<
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right into the drive
position Β and the brake pedal is pressed, the
Sequential mode is activated.
Switching engine off
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking, firmly apply the parking brake, as
otherwise the vehicle could roll.<
Manual transmission*
1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle
stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into a driving position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If N is engaged when switching off the
engine, this will be pointed out to you visu-
ally and acoustically.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-
nal sounds when you drive away. The
parking brake is applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to apply the parking
brake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it
too firmly. In doing so, continuously press the
button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise,
too firm an application of the parking brake can
lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the
vehicle to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally engage the park-
ing brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly com-
ing to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission*
While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane,
press the gearshift lever toward the right,
otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th
gear could result in engine damage.<
When shifting into 1st gear, you may feel a
slight jolt. This part of normal operation and no
reason for concern.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
When pressing the gearshift lever to the left,
overcome some resistance.
Shift lights
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with a
sporty driving style, shift lights in the Head-up
Display
*
indicate the optimum shifting point
briefly before reaching the maximum rpm. Refer
to Shift lights, page 60.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
58
Sequential Manual
Transmission with Drivelogic
The concept
The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
with Drivelogic is an automated manual trans-
mission in which an electrohydraulic system
handles the clutching and gear changes.
The Sequential Manual Transmission is oper-
ated with the selector lever and two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Optional manual or automatic operation:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> Selection option between different driving
programs, Drivelogic, refer to page 59
> Upshift display, shift lights, refer to page 60
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in Sequential opera-
tion
> Automatic double clutching
Selector lever positions
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral
> Β: Drive position:
> +: manual upshifting
> –: manual downshifting
> D/S: switch between Drive mode and
Sequential mode
Shiftlock
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Idle
Always select before starting engine.
If the driving situation requires, e.g. when down-
shifting on a slippery road surface, the Sequen-
tial Manual Transmission automatically
clutches and then declutches again, i.e. it is not
necessary to manually shift into idling mode.
The system shifts into N when you open
the driver's door or the hood with the
engine running and do not operate pedals, shift
paddles or the selector lever. To begin driving
after closing the driver's door or the hood, first
shift the selector lever into the N position, and
then shift into drive.<
S Sequential mode
You can shift up and down using the shift pad-
dles or the selector lever. You do not need to
remove your foot from the accelerator to do so.
Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:
press selector lever to the right toward D/S.
To switch back into the Sequential mode: shift
using the shift paddles or the selector lever or
press selector lever to the right toward D/S
again.
Starting off is also possible on a level road sur-
face in second gear, e.g. in case of ice.
In the following situations, the Sequential Man-
ual Transmission thinks for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a feasible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-
mission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
D Drive mode
In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:
shift using the shift paddles or the selector
lever, or press the selector level to the right in
the D/S direction.
Shifting back to Drive mode: press the selector
lever to the right in the D/S direction again.
Kickdown: for rapid acceleration, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator pedal as far
down as it will go. You achieve maximum accel-
eration.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Gear 1 to 7, R, N engaged
2 Selected driving program,
matches the number of illuminated fields,
refer to Drivelogic on page 59
3 In drive mode, the currently selected gear
followed by a D is displayed.
The gear display flashes when you open
the driver's door with the engine running.
If you do not subsequently operate the pedals,
shift paddles, or selector lever, then the system
shifts into N.<
Gear changes
Using selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector lever for-
ward.
Using shift paddles on steering wheel
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
paddle –.
Drivelogic
With Drivelogic various driving programs are
available to you.
Each time you change between the Sequential
mode and the Drive mode, the driving program
last selected in the respective mode is active.
Exception: after the first change from the
Sequential to the Drive mode, driving program 3
is active.
In Drive mode
There are five different driving programs, rang-
ing from relaxed 1 to sporty/highly dynamic 5.
In Sequential mode
You can choose from six driving programs from
balanced/dynamic 1 to sporty/purist 6.
Program 6 is only available when the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, refer
to page 76. If DSC is activated, then the system
switches from program 6 to program 5.
To maintain vehicle stability, always acti-
vate DSC whenever possible.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
60
Selecting driving program with button
in center console
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
driving program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 59.
Selecting driving program via button
on steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred driving pro-
gram with the button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 50.
With the ignition switched on you can change
the settings of MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive"
3. Select "Drivelogic:" and press the control-
ler. The first setting is selected.
4. Turn controller to set Drive mode or
Sequential mode.
5. Press controller to select driving programs.
6. Turn controller to set driving program.
7. Press the controller.
Shift lights
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with a
sporty driving style in the Sequential mode,
shift lights in the Head-up Display
*
indicate the
optimum shifting point briefly before reaching
the maximum rpm.
1. Activate the Head-up Display, refer to
page 86
2. Select the "M View" display on the Head-up
Display.
The current engine speed is highlighted on
the tachometer.
3. When approaching the maximum rpm, yel-
low illuminated fields 1 of the tachometer
consecutively indicate the approaching
upshift point.
4. At the very latest, shift when the field 2
lights up in red.
When the permissible maximum rpm is
reached, the entire tachometer begins to flash.
When the maximum rpm is exceeded, the fuel
supply is cut off to protect the engine. Always
avoid engine speeds in this range.
M Engine Dynamic Control
With M Engine Dynamic Control you can influ-
ence how sporty the reaction of your vehicle to
accelerator pedal movements is to be. Three
programs are available for engine control.
"P 400" program
In the "P 400" program, the engine reacts gen-
tly to the movement of the accelerator pedal.
This is, for example, ideal for city driving or driv-
ing on snow. In the process, the fuel consump-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
tion is minimal and the engine output is
reduced.
"P 500" program
The "P 500" program provides maximum per-
formance and more spontaneous reaction of
the engine to accelerator pedal movements.
"P 500 Sport" program
In the "P 500 Sport" program, the engine
responds to accelerator pedal movements with
a high degree of spontaneity and uncompro-
mising sportiness while exhibiting maximum
performance.
Selecting program
The "P 400" program is activated after each
engine start.
Press the POWER button to activate the
"P 500" program. Pressing the POWER button
repeatedly switches between the programs
"P 400" and "P 500".
You can also activate your preferred program
with the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 50. You can activate the
"P 500 Sport" program only with MDrive.
For the programs "P 500" and "P 500 Sport",
the LED in the POWER button lights up.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal
lamp.<
Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
62
4. Triple turn signal activation is activated
and is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
The wiper operation is controlled automatically
as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen-
sor is located on the windshield, directly in front
of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the thumbwheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
headlamps are simultaneously washed at
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washing mechanisms if
there is any danger that the fluid will
freeze on the windshield. If you do so, your
vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing,
use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise
you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For
this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering col-
umn. If the engine braking effect is insufficient
on a downhill grade, the set speed may be
exceeded. Speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, loose road surface, and
poor visibility. Otherwise you could lose control
of the vehicle and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3 Interrupting and deactivating system
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining, storing and increasing
speed
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The speed currently being driven is maintained
and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer,
see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press lever to resistance point for a longer time:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
The speed is increased to the next fives posi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
64
tion in the mph display or the next tens position
in the km/h display.
Press and hold the lever beyond the resistance
point:
The vehicle accelerates more quickly.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1; the speed is
reduced.
Interrupting system
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
The display 1 in the speedometer changes
color.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
> when you apply the brakes, even with the
parking brake
> when you clutch
> when you shift using the shift paddles or the
selector lever
> when the DSC comes on
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
Deactivating system
> Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3
> Switch off the ignition
The speed stored in the memory is deleted.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Controls Overview
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Time, outside temperature, refer to Com-
puter on page 66
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Press button:
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with ignition switched off, odometer is
briefly displayed
Tachometer
The advance warning field, arrow 1, and the red
warning field, arrow 2, change depending on
the engine temperature. As the engine temper-
ature rises, the permissible engine speed also
increases. Avoid allowing the engine speed to
rise as far as the orange warning field whenever
possible.
Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn-
ing field. At high revs in this range, the flow of
fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 196.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
66
Engine oil temperature*
The general operating temperature lies
between 1757/806 and 2507/1206. Do
not exceed a value of approx. 2657/1306.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, the per-
missible engine speed, and with it the available
engine output is reduced.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/
70 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 184.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Time and outside temperature
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Oil level, refer to Checking engine oil level
on page 193
Manual transmission:
The cruising range, average fuel con-
sumption and oil level are shown in the lower
display in place of the gear indicator.
It is possible to change between the time and
data display by pressing the CHECK button in
the turn signal lever.<
Time
To set the time, refer to page 69.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 68.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption: press BC
button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed and average
fuel consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival, provided that a
destination was entered in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 117.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con-
troller again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
68
Resetting the Trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
All values are reset.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units of measure for con-
sumption, distances, temperature and pres-
sure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-
mine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
You can select a display of more detailed infor-
mation on the maintenance scope on the Con-
trol Display. For operating principle refer to
page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 70; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Turn the controller until the desired month
is displayed, and then press the controller.
8. Set the year in the same manner.
The date is stored.
To exit the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 197.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the
time format below.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
70
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting date
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
This symbol means that a Check Control
message has been generated. The symbol con-
tinues to be visible even when the Check Con-
trol message disappears after a short time. The
warning lamps and text messages are stored
and can be displayed later, also refer to
page 72.
Explanatory text messages
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Exit the displayed information:
Move the controller to the left.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are hidden after approx.
20 seconds, but remain stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
72
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
2. Press the button:
When the button is pressed again, a differ-
ent message is displayed.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Limit warning"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
Settings on Control Display
Language on Control Display
Setting the language
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Warning signal volume
You can raise or lower the volume of the warn-
ing signals, e.g. the 'Fasten safety belt'
reminder, relative to the entertainment sound
output. The warning signals have a fixed mini-
mum and maximum volume that cannot be
dropped below or exceeded.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol-
ume control
> "PDC": volume of the PDC
*
signal tone
relative to the entertainment sound out-
put
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.
for the 'Fasten safety belt' reminder, rel-
ative to the entertainment sound output
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
74
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display
*
alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sounds for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-
ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise the physical circumstances would mean
that the system warning was too late.<
Switching on automatically
The system starts to operate approx. one sec-
ond after you shift into reverse or move the
selector lever into position R with the engine
running or the ignition switched on.
Wait this short time before driving off.
Switching on manually
Press the button, the LED lights up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Automatic deactivation
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, the position is corre-
spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc. As the distance between
vehicle and object decreases, the intervals
between the tones become shorter. If the dis-
tance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ing jets for long periods and maintain a distance
of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
Exhaust gases near the rear sensors can cause
a signal tone to sound.
PDC with visual warning*
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already shown there before a
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
76
signal tone sounds. The display appears on the
Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstacles always remains with
the driver. Even when sensors are provided,
there is a blind spot in which objects can no
longer be detected. The system is also subject
to the physical limits that apply to all forms of
ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with tow bars and trailer cou-
plings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects etc.
Low objects already displayed, e.g. curbs, can
also disappear from the detection area of the
sensors again before or after a continuous tone
already sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g.
ledges, cannot be detected. For this reason,
drive with care; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury or property damage.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. For information on safe braking, refer to
page 109.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steer-
ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
produces maximum braking force boosting and
thus helps to achieve the shortest possible
braking distance during full braking maneuvers.
This system exploits all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC optimizes vehicle stability and traction. It
also detects unstable driving states such as
understeering and oversteering, and helps
keep the vehicle on course within the physical
limits by reducing the engine output and by
braking at the wheels.
The DSC is operational every time you start the
engine.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin further by taking risks.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp stays lit: DSC is deactivated.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
The M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control. It enables driving
with greater longitudinal and lateral accelera-
tion on dry road surfaces, however with limited
vehicle stability. The system does not provide
stabilizing intervention by reducing the engine
output and braking at the wheels until the abso-
lute driving limit is reached. Steering correc-
tions by the driver may also be required in this
driving state.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The M Dynamic Mode is deactivated each time
the engine is started.
With the M Dynamic Mode activated, sta-
bilizing interventions are only carried out
to a reduced degree.<
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
DSC activated and the M Dynamic Mode
deactivated whenever possible.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started. The indica-
tor lamp stays lit: M Dynamic Mode is
activated.
The indicator lamp lights up continuously and
the DSC indicator lamp flashes: the M Dynamic
Mode is active and controls the drive and brak-
ing forces.
Activating MDM
You activate the M Dynamic Mode with the
button on the steering wheel, refer to MDrive on
page 50.
With the ignition switched on you can set
MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. Select "M Drive" and press the controller.
3. Select "Drivelogic:" and press the control-
ler.
You can also activate and deactivate the
M Dynamic Mode with the MDM button.
Deactivating MDM again
Press the button on the steering wheel or the
MDM button
*
again; the MDM indicator lamp
goes out.
Deactivating DSC*
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
the system activated whenever possi-
ble.<
When rocking free or starting off from deep
snow or on loose road surfaces, it can be useful
to briefly deactivate DSC.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
78
Press the DSC OFF button; the DSC indicator
lamp lights up continuously. DSC and MDM are
deactivated.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
Manual transmission
*
:
Press and hold the MDM button.
Under unfavorable traction conditions, the
engine output may be briefly reduced even
when DSC is deactivated.
Reactivating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button; the indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
You can also activate and deactivate DSC with
the button on the steering wheel, refer to
MDrive on page 50.
Manual transmission
*
:
Press the MDM button.
Malfunction in driving-stability control
systems
The warning lamp for the brake system
lights up yellow, together with the indi-
cator lamps for ABS, DSC and Tire
Pressure Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor.
A message appears on the Control Dis-
play. The driving stability control sys-
tems have failed. While you may con-
tinue, you should remember to proceed
cautiously and drive defensively while
avoiding full brake applications. The
Tire Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor is
also malfunctioning. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The DSC warning lamp lights up. A
malfunction has occurred in DSC
including MDM. The stability mainte-
nance functions are no longer available. The
vehicle remains operational. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
The brake system warning lamp lights
up yellow. A message appears on the
Control Display. The brake assistant is
defective. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
Starting off
On slopes
The drive-off assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the brake.
2. Release the brake and begin to drive imme-
diately.
After releasing the brake, begin to drive
immediately; otherwise, the drive-off
assistant no longer holds the vehicle after
approx. 2 seconds and your vehicle will start to
roll backward.<
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accel-
erator, but apply the brake pedal or parking
brake instead. Otherwise overheating and
heavy wear can result in the area of the Sequen-
tial Manual Transmission.<
To protect the clutch of the Sequential Manual
Transmission from overheating, the starting-off
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
behavior is changed under heavy loading, e.g. a
rapid succession of starts on slopes. This can
be noticed from shaking during starting off.
On a slippery surface
1. Select the "P 400" program of M Engine
Dynamic Control, refer to page 60.
2. Gently press accelerator pedal to prevent
wheels from spinning when starting off.
Clutch protection with manual
transmission
Be sure to avoid riding the clutch for longer peri-
ods.
Your BMW M6 is equipped with an overload
protection for the clutch. Riding the clutch for
longer periods is detected and the engine man-
agement system limits the engine speed to pro-
tect the clutch. This can result in the vehicle fail-
ing to accelerate when the clutch pedal is
partially depressed.
EDC Electronic Damping
Control
The concept
If the influencing variables such as road surface
quality or operating conditions such as steer-
ing, braking etc. change, the damping automat-
ically adjusts to the new conditions within a
fraction of a second.
You can choose from three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want com-
fort-oriented coordination of shock absorbers
and steering.
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers control that is bal-
anced between comfort and sportiness.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want a con-
sistently sporty coordination of shock absorb-
ers and steering.
Selecting program
Sequential Manual Transmission with Drive-
logic:
Manual transmission:
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off.
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
The last selected program is active each time
the engine is started.
You can also activate your preferred program
with the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 50.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ-
ual wheels during driving.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
80
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pres-
sure and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically. The system is initialized
after this activation phase.
The initialization process adopts the set infla-
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
The system is not initialized when traveling with
snow chains
*
.<
With Sequential Manual Transmission via the
button in the center console:
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 5 seconds.
After the button is released, the warning
lamp lights up in yellow for several seconds
in the instrument cluster, refer to Indication
of a flat tire. The message "Activating…"
appears on the Control Display for a few
seconds.
3. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during the trip
without providing feedback.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
"Activating…" is displayed on the Control
Display.
6. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving, which
can be interrupted at any time. "Flat Tire Moni-
tor active" is displayed on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure
loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify damaged tire. To do this, check the
tire inflation pressure using the M Mobility
System, refer to Producing tire inflation
pressure on page 207.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to page 205, or replace the dam-
aged wheel, refer to Changing wheels on
page 207.
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered
with by other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
82
1. Press the button.
This opens the main menu.
2. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Reset TPM"
5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
6. "Reset"
7. "Yes"
Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
8. After a few minutes of driving, the set tire
inflation pressures in the tires are applied as
the set values to be monitored. The system
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, resetting is continued automati-
cally. On the Control Display, the tires are
shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is
displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is shown.<
Notification of low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-
tify the damaged tire on the vehicle.
3. Repairing flat tire with M Mobility System,
refer to page 205, or replace the damaged
wheel or wheels, refer to Changing wheels*
on page 207.
The spare tire
*
is equipped with the necessary
TPM electronics and is also monitored after
mounting and after resetting the system.
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop informed on handling TPM which
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheel is mounted without TPM elec-
tronics.
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare
*
, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires. As an added safety fea-
ture, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly underin-
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator lights up, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Brake force display
> On the left: normal braking.
> On the right: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: Head airbags
3 Side airbags
4 Knee airbag
5 Knee airbag
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
84
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head. The knee air-
bag protects the legs from colliding with the
cockpit.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag restraint system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the air-
bag system. This category includes the uphol-
stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the side trim panels on the
doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along
with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt
to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired airbag triggering,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The system
correspondingly activates or deactivates the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child in the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 52.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side can be deactivated for teenag-
ers and adults in certain sitting positions; the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up when this occurs. In these cases,
change the sitting position so that the front pas-
senger airbags are activated and the indicator
lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be
produced by changing the sitting position,
transport the corresponding person in the rear
seat.
Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,
ball mats or other items onto the front passen-
ger seat unless they are specifically recom-
mended by BMW. Do not lay objects under the
seat which could press against the seat from
below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of the
occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
The illustration here shows a possible arrange-
ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip-
ment packages or in the Convertible, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
side depending on whether the seat is occu-
pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the
front passenger airbags are activated or deacti-
vated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Most child seats are detected by the sys-
tem, especially the child seats required by
the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufac-
tured. After installing a child seat, make sure
that the indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
seat has been detected and the front passenger
airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up if, for
example, the system detects a person of
sufficient size seated correctly on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
But the front, knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are still deactivated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 55, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of an accident or a critical
driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon-
gitudinal axis, or loss of ground contact. The
rollover bars located behind the rear head
restraints are deployed within fractions of a sec-
ond.
As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated
into the windshield frame, the rollover protec-
tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants
have the necessary headroom.
Always keep the path of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system experienced no
impact after automatic activation, then it can be
lowered again. No tools are necessary for this
purpose.
1. Press the release backward and hold in that
position.
2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway
down from above.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
3. Let go of the release.
4. Press the rollover protection unit down until
it snaps into place.
5. Use the same procedure for the second roll-
over protection unit.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after unexpected triggering.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is raised.
No changes of any nature may be made to the
individual components of the rollover protec-
tion system and wiring.
Work on the rollover protection system may
only be performed at a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the system
can lead to failure or malfunction.
For a system check and to ensure long-term
functioning, you must comply with the mainte-
nance intervals of the service requirements,
refer to page 68.<
Head-up Display*
The concept
With the Head-up Display important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Selecting displays
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The information appears in the Head-up
Display.
"M View": the M view appears in the Head-
up Display. Information unavailable in the M
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
view appears on the Control Display in gray and
cannot be selected.
"M View": the default view is displayed.
The M view for the Head-up Display can also be
selected with the button on the steering
wheel, refer to MDrive on page 50.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Default view
1 Navigation instructions
2 Stored desired speed of cruise control
3 Speed
M view
1 Current engine speed, highlighted
2 Advance warning field of tachometer
3 Red warning field of tachometer, also refer
to Tachometer on page 65
4 Speed
5 Gear display
For information on the shift lights in the
tachometer, refer to page 60.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain seating positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the basic
setting checked at a BMW center.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the require-
ments of the Head-up Display to enable a pre-
cise display. A film in the windshield prevents
double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Care instructions
You can find valuable information on this topic
under Care, starting on page 199.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
Only clean the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with
a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may
damage it.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
*
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
*
2 Low beams and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run-
ning lamps
*
, welcome lamps, Adaptive
Light Control
*
and High-beam Assistant
*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off
when the light switch is in position 2 or 3. The
daytime running lamps have already been
switched off at the same time as the ignition.
For this reason, switch on the side marker
lamps as needed, switch position 1; otherwise,
the vehicle is not lit.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is preferable to
switch on the roadside parking lamps on one
side, refer to page 91.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Light
Control
*
is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on.
You can also change to the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 90. In the situation
described above, the lamps switch to the low
beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock
the vehicle, the parking lamps and interior light-
ing remain illuminated for a brief time.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Lamps
90
3. "Welcome light"
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time. You can set the
duration or deactivate the function via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set or deactivate the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
The daytime running lamps light up in
position 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in
position 1, the parking lamps light up after the
ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps*
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control*
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch into position 3, refer to page 89.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control is not active when driving in
reverse and points toward the passenger side
when the vehicle is stopped.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. A sensor on the front side of
the inside rearview mirror controls the process.
The assistant makes sure that the high beams
are switched on whenever traffic conditions
permit. This relieves you of the burden of con-
stantly switching back and forth and simulta-
neously provides you with the best possible vis-
ibility. Naturally, you can intervene at any time to
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 89.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the High-beam
Assistant is activated. The system
automatically switches between high beams
and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic,
vehicles ahead of you, and sufficiently lit areas,
e.g. in built-up zones.
Manually switching between high
beams and low beams
If you wish or the situation requires, you can
intervene at any time.
> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you wish to use the low
beams, just switch on the low beams with
the turn signal lever. This deactivates the
High-beam Assistant.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you wish to use the high
beams, simply switch on the high beams as
usual. This deactivates the system and it is
up to you to switch back to low beams.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> When the low beams are on, use the head-
lamp flasher as usual.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Lamps
92
System limits
The High-beam Assistant is designed to
maximize the amount of time that high
beams can be safely used and to quickly switch
back to low beams when traffic approaches.
The system cannot completely replace driver
intervention when unusual conditions are
encountered. For this reason, switch to low
beams when circumstances so dictate. Failure
to do so can pose a safety risk.<
Below are a few examples of situations in which
the system may not react or may only function
to a limited degree, requiring personal interven-
tion:
> in extremely unfavorable weather condi-
tions such as fog or heavy precipitation
> in sensing road users with poor inherent
illumination such as pedestrians, cyclists,
equestrians, horse-drawn vehicles, railroad
or shipping traffic close to the road, and at
deer crossings
> in tight curves, on steep crests or dips, with
cross-traffic, or with partially hidden
oncoming traffic on divided highways
> in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs
> in the low speed range
> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area
of the inside rearview mirror
> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the inside rearview mir-
ror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass
cleaner
Moreover, no system can operate without limi-
tations. High-beam Assistant operation is sub-
ject to conditions that may reduce the system's
ability to recognize the difference between
actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for
example, highly reflective signs, markers, and
streetlights. To be on the safe side, the system
may periodically interpret these situations as
conditions that require low beams. Below are
some of the situations in which premature
switching to low beams can occur:
> approaching large and/or highly reflective
signs
> approaching certain lights, such as drive-
way lighting and porch lights
> approaching certain traffic signals
> approaching large reflective markers
In these situations, the system may interpret
the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir-
ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions
return to normal, the system will reactivate the
high beams.
The High-beam Assistant cannot replace the
driver's responsibility for complying with state
laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to
visibility and traffic conditions.
Switching off via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
High beam assistant is activated and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Instrument lighting
The lighting intensity can be adjusted with the
thumbwheel with the parking lamps/low beams
switched on.
Interior lamps
Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps
and sill
panel lighting
is automatic.
With the courtesy lamps,
LED lights are pro-
vided in the outside rearview mirrors to illumi-
nate the exterior area around the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 55.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press button 1.
If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting, courtesy lamps and sill panel lighting
are to remain switched off continually, press the
button for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:
You can turn them on and off using buttons 2
located next to the lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Climate
94
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air for the upper body area, refer to Ventila-
tion on page 97
3 Air to footwell
4 Temperature, left side of passenger com-
partment
5 Manual air distribution, driver's side
6 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
7 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat utilization
8 AUTO program
9 Switching cooling function on and off man-
ually
10 Temperature, right side of passenger com-
partment
11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
12 Maximum cooling
13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked
car ventilation system
15 Rear window defroster
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
comfortable for you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 27.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling function is switched on along with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
The respective current setting is briefly dis-
played on the Control Display when the button
is pressed.
Select the intensity of the AUTO program using
the AUTO button:
> –Low
> –Medium
> –High
Convertible program*
When the convertible top is open, the convert-
ible program is active in addition. In the convert-
ible program, the automatic climate control is
optimized for driving with the convertible top
open. In addition, the air volume is increased as
the speed increases.
The effect of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector
is installed.<
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble at any time of year, if necessary with the
maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When changing between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating output, regardless of the outside tem-
perature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Climate
96
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off after a while.
Convertible: the rear window
defroster is only activated when the rear win-
dow is closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
wires are used as an antenna and are not part of
the rear window defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
The air volume is reduced to save battery
power. The display stays the same.
Air distribution, manual
You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle
interior via various programs, separately for the
driver's and passenger's side:
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
> Individual program
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired air distribution of the
respective program is shown on
the Control Display.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
This function is only available when the engine
is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensa-
tion on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is also switched on with
the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
At the lowest temperature, the automatic cli-
mate control switches into recirculating air
mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the
vents for the upper body. Therefore, open these
vents for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system then recircu-
lates the air currently within the vehicle. During
AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and controls the shut-off auto-
matically.
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, as the air qual-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu-
ously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Turn to the right, refer to arrow.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> with engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.
2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left
again.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
Ventilation
1 Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
vent outlets
2 Levers to change the vent outlet direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-
apulted outwards and cause injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
Adjusting temperature in upper body
region
You can adjust the temperature in the upper
body region with iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Climate
98
4. "Ventilation temperature"
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a stan-
dard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can have more detailed information shown
on the Control Display, refer to page 68.
Parked car ventilation*
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. Please
reactivated it after this time.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
100
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 101.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right-hand memory
button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the
LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs
are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the inte-
grated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the mem-
ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.
All stored programs are deleted.
Individual programs cannot be deleted.
Rememorizing individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held remote control
approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/30 cm away
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the command button of
the original hand-held transmitter. As soon
as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both
buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
102
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Raise the lid into the closed position.
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
A storage compartment is located in the arm-
rest between the front seats. This compartment
is integrated into the central locking system and
can also be locked separately using the hotel
function, refer to page 31.
To open the cover:
Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be
folded upward.
Depending on the version, the storage com-
partment can be equipped with a correspond-
ing cradle
*
for the telephone or mobile phone.
Connection for external audio device
A connection for an external audio device is
located in the storage compartment. You can,
for example, connect a CD player or an MP3
player, and play the sound via the vehicle
speakers, refer to page 156.
Adjusting height
The center armrest can be set in two positions.
Pull the right button:
Move the armrest upward or downward and
lock it in the desired position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Storage compartments
Storage compartments in the
passenger compartment
Storage compartment behind center
armrest
To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.
The compartment contains the cupholder
and
the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 31.
Other compartments and nets
Other compartments are provided in the doors
as well as in the front center console
*
.
Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats and in the passenger footwell
*
.
To prevent the risk of injury during an
accident, do not stow hard or sharp-
edged items in the nets.<
Storage compartments in the luggage
compartment
You have the following storage options in the
luggage compartment:
> Storage compartment in the right side trim
panel, which is also suitable, if you so
desire, for accommodating the vehicle liter-
ature.
> Net at the loading lip for smaller items.
Coupe: Clothes hooks
To fold down, press at the top edge.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Cupholders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force containers
that are too large into the cupholders, otherwise
damage could result.<
The compartment of the rear center console
contains a built-in cupholder and a removable
one.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
The removable cupholder can be inserted into
the side of the center console.
Ashtray*
Opening
Press the trim strip of the cover.
Emptying
Press the opened cover beyond the resistance
point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for
removal.
Cigarette lighter*
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical devices
Socket
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes.
In front passenger footwell
Access to the socket:
Fold open the cover.
Ski bag*
The ski bag permits safe and clean transport of
up to two pairs of standard skis or one snow-
board.
You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/
2.10 m long.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Loading
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.
The zipper facilitates access to the stowed
items and drying of the ski bag.
3. Press the button in the luggage compart-
ment.
4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic
holder to secure it to the rear panel.
To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger vehicle occu-
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at
the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele-
ment back into place. Make sure that you do not
damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
108
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-
ues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Do not use the driving programs 5 and 6, refer
to Drivelogic on page 59, during break-in.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 5,500 rpm or 105 mph/
170 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
The engine and driving speed can gradually be
increased up to a continuous vehicle speed of
135 mph/220 km/h. Only drive at top speed
briefly, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The function of the transmission is only at its
optimized level after driving a distance of
approx. 300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed
engine speeds of 5,500 rpm during this time.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its opti-
mized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. With manual transmission:
During this break-in period, engage the clutch
gently.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
General driving notes
Ground clearance
Make sure that sufficient ground clear-
ance is available. To drive down curbs,
select the "Sport" program of the EDC Elec-
tronic Damping Control, refer to page 79, to
keep the ground clearance as uniform as possi-
ble. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.<
Closing luggage compartment lid
Only drive with the luggage compartment
lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust
can penetrate into the passenger compart-
ment.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lug-
gage compartment lid open:
1. Coupe: close both windows.
Convertible: with closed top, close all win-
dows.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 96.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
109
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail
pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini-
mum tire tread on page 189.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
The pulsing of he brake pedal indicates that the
ABS is controlling braking.
In certain braking situations the perforated
brake rotors can cause operating noises which,
however, have not effect on the performance
and operating safety of the brake system.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and thus reduced
efficiency of the brake system, downshift
to a gear in which only minimal brake applica-
tions are needed when descending long or
steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis-
tent pressure on the brake can lead to high tem-
peratures, brake wear and possibly even brake
failure.<
Sequential Manual Transmission: do not
drive in idle or with the engine switched
off, otherwise there will be no engine braking
action or support of the braking force and steer-
ing.
Manual transmission: do not drive with the
clutch depressed, in idle or with the engine
switched off, otherwise there will be no engine
braking action or support of the braking force
and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
110
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
This can also lead to long-lasting decreases in
comfort and squeaking noise during braking.
These decreases in comfort can also be pro-
duced by long braking maneuvers with a low
pedal pressure.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
For technical information about the brake sys-
tem, refer to page 112.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys-
tem during operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blowout.<
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-
aged.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving con-
ditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
200 lbs.:
800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
111
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Place heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
bulkhead behind the rear seats.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
or securing straps to
hold down small and lightweight luggage
and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the cargo area are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustration.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud-
den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces-
sary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 223, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
with the upper attachment points for LATCH,
refer to page 53; otherwise, you could damage
them.<
Pad on base of luggage compartment
You can use the pad as needed, for example to
transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is
washable and has an anti-skid effect.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW M6 Engineering
112
BMW M6 Engineering
V10 High Output Engine
With a 305 cu in/5 liter displacement, the high-
speed V10 engine generates a maximum out-
put of 373 kW and a maximum torque of
383 lb ft/520 Nm. Its spontaneous response
characteristics yield a very broad usable engine
speed range. At the maximum engine speed of
8,250 rpm, the flow of fuel is interrupted in
order to protect the engine. Due to the powerful
engine dynamics, when the vehicle is at rest,
the maximum engine speed is limited to
7,000 rpm.
Warming up
The emissions control system causes the
V10 high-output engine to have slightly
rougher running characteristics during its
warm-up phase.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the sys-
tem design.
For additional information on warming up, refer
to Tachometer on page 65 and Engine oil tem-
perature on page 66.
Compound brake
Your BMW M6 has a high-performance brake
system with perforated compound brake rotors.
Due to the special structural features of these
brake rotors, function noises occur during brak-
ing, but this has no effect on the performance,
operating safety, and stability of the brakes.
Braking correctly
In order to keep the brake system in optimum
condition, it is useful to put them under load at
regular intervals in accordance with the nature
of the vehicle.
Also refer to Corrosion on brake rotors on
page 109.
Drivetrain
In your BMW M6, particular importance was
attached to the direct connection of the engine
to the drive system. Due to the torsionally rigid
design of the drive train, the transmission of the
torque is also audible, as is customary in a
sports car. As a result, load shifts can be dis-
tinctly audible. This does not in any way impair
the function or the service life of the compo-
nents.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can enter
destinations and specify your route so that your
navigation system guides you reliably to your
destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation system
116
Navigation system
General information
With the help of satellites, the navigation sys-
tem is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti-
nation you enter.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Failure to take to this precaution
can place you in violation of the law and put
vehicle occupants and other road users in dan-
ger.<
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center.
Depending on the data volume, a data update
may take several hours.
> The data are updated while you are driving.
> The update is resumed automatically when
a trip is continued after an interruption.
> All functions are available during the trip.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is com-
pleted.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting the navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Removing the navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Displaying information on the version
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information is displayed on the data version.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
117
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 119
> Last destinations, refer to page 120
> Special destinations, refer to page 120
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 122
> Selecting home address, refer to page 120
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 123
> Destination entry via BMW Assist
*
, refer to
page 121
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. If you do not observe this precau-
tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 125. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town/
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
118
To delete letters:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is
displayed.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case all streets of the entered
country are offered for selection. The related
town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the country currently dis-
played.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
9. Select the street.
Entering house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
> Set your "Route preference",
refer to page 126.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.",
refer to page 120.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 174.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts are displayed with addresses if
these have been checked as destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 175.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces-
sary, using "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
120
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 174.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to this location.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. "Search area"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.
Category details
For some special destinations, additional
details can be displayed that are available in the
navigation data, e.g. Italian-style restaurant.
"Category details"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
> "At current location"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the current loca-
tion and are displayed with a directional
arrow pointing to the destination.
> "At destination", "At a different destina-
tion", "Along route"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the location where
the search is being performed.
> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym-
bols. The view depends on the map
scale and the category.
3. Highlight a special destination: the destina-
tion is displayed in the preview map.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the BMW Con-
cierge service, refer to page 177.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max-
imum of 100 entries.
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight a special destination: The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
122
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination via
the map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol. The interactive map is
started.
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another dest.".
> "Return": return to the map view.
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis-
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi-
nates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
> Select a symbol and "Start guid-
ance", if necessary.
> "Exit interactive map"
> Map display
> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 120.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
General information
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice activation system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice activation function for this pur-
pose if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Voice commands}.<
Saying the entries
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the system language, refer to
page 73.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> The town/city, street and house number
can be said as a single sentence.
*
> Spell the entry if the language region and
the system language differ.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag-
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
Entering an address*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the town or city, street and house num-
ber in a single sentence.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
6. If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g. the town/
city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as a
complete word
*
.
The methods of entry depend on the nav-
igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit-
ies may be suggested.
2. {Enter address}
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
4. Select town/city:
> Select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> Select other town/city: {New entry}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 2}
> Spell an entry: {Spell city}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
124
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/
city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from this list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
Entering a house number
You can enter house numbers up to 999:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Adding further intermediate
destinations
Further intermediate destinations can be
added.
Saving a destination
The destination is automatically added to the
list of last destinations.
Planning a trip
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
Entering further intermediate
destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered:
"Start guidance"
Storing a trip
Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
{Start guidance}
{Add as another destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK"
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Starting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing trips
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations can be displayed in
reverse order after destination guidance is
started.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Rearranging the intermediate
destinations
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip dest."
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
Deleting an intermediate destination
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip dest."
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Word-matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing
checks, comparing your destination entries
with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis
for instant response. The user benefits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another coun-
try.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
126
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route,
which is a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads
> "Efficient route": optimized combination
of the fastest and shortest roads
> "Short route": short distance, irrespec-
tive of how fast or slow progress will be
> "Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes while destination
guidance is active
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> Avoid highways where possible:
"Avoid highways"
> Avoid toll roads where possible:
"Avoid toll roads"
> Avoid ferries where possible:
"Avoid ferries"
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 128
> Arrow view in the Head-up Display
*
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis-
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle-
tins are displayed for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num-
ber of miles.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta-
tions along the route are recommended.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of gas stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
128
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 20.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting the volume of voice
instructions*
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map display
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map view:
Information in the map view:
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
To show/hide information on the map:
Press the controller.
Viewing the map
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select a setting:
> "View facing north"
> "View in dir. of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "Arrow display"
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions are
switched on
Voice instructions are
switched off
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping destina-
tion guidance
Switching voice instructions
on/off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Press the controller.
Changing the map section
Select the interactive map.
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
3. Set the optimized map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions. When
the traffic bulletin map is activated, this
setting is disregarded.
> "Satellite images"
Satellite images
*
are displayed depend-
ing on availability and resolution.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas
that are contained in the navigation data
are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic Info map"
The map is optimized for displaying traf-
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special
destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for the split screen display
The map view for the split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is switched on.
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Exit ramp view"
Changing the scale
1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Turn the controller.
Traffic information*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes-
sage Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually via iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map view.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con-
ditions contained herein.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
130
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
management centers and the traffic information
is periodically updated.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to your planned route is auto-
matically displayed. Whether destination guid-
ance is active or not, you can have the traffic
bulletins displayed in the map view or in the traf-
fic info list.
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map view.
Opening the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol: "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
5. Select a traffic bulletin.
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
3. Exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic bulletins on the map
When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the
Control Display changes to a black and white
display. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in
this setting. The symbols for the special desti-
nations are no longer displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic Info map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc-
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa-
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected,
refer to page 127.
During destination guidance, traffic obstruc-
tions on the route are taken into consideration.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance"
is not selected, you will be shown certain infor-
mation, such as the length of the traffic conges-
tion, when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Selecting a detour
Select the symbol: "Detour".
"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current
destination guidance.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the
route will be changed automatically in the event
of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on the road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly cal-
culated route may lead through the traffic
obstruction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
What to do if…
132
What to do if…
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is best when you have an unob-
structed view to the sky.
> The destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in black and
white?
When the traffic bulletin map is activated,
the Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter describes how to operate the radio
and CD player and how to create their tone
settings.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
136
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD/DVD player
> CD changer
*
> Video
*
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
> Voice activation system
Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD
player
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off
When the system is switched on, the
most recently selected radio station or
track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume
2 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player,
CD changer and certain multimedia
devices
3 Eject the CD/DVD
4 CD/DVD drive
*
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
Sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition is switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this pur-
pose.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback, Surround*
You can select between stereo and multi-chan-
nel playback, Surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "L7 Surround"
Multi-channel playback, Surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
vated, depending on the audio track selected.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Volume
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control
> "PDC"
*
: volume of the PDC signal tone rel-
ative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the safety belt reminder, relative to the
entertainment sound output
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
138
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
*
> Weather Band
*
> Satellite radio
*
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn and press the controller
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 11.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection using the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: Press the controller for an
extended period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Radio
140
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
About programmable memory buttons
You can also store a station on the programma-
ble memory buttons, refer to page 20.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis-
rupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi-
tal signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with better sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For-
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Due to
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe-
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro-
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Weather Band*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a ques-
tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-
net at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
To operate via the iDrive:
1. Switch on the radio.
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Satellite radio
142
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
Enabling channels
1. Ensure that reception is reliable. Reception
is usually best when you have an unob-
structed view to the sky.
2. "Radio"
3. "Satellite radio"
4. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
5. Select the channel.
If the channel has not yet been enabled, then a
phone number and the ESN electronic serial
number are displayed.
6. Call the phone number to have the channel
enabled.
The channels can be disabled again via this
phone number.
Disabling channels
The channels can be disabled by phone. To do
so, have the electronic serial number ESN
ready.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio".
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Open "Options".
5. The electronic serial number is displayed.
6. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a channel
Selecting a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store Channel"
6. Call up the desired memory location.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed once again
after a short time.
Displaying information about another
channel
Information can be displayed about a channel
that is not being played.
1. Highlight the channel about which you wish
to display information.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Channel info"
Changing the channel using the button
next to the CD/DVD drive
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec-
onds, a message is displayed on the Control
Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
144
CD/DVD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in auto-
matically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer
*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Starting playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 148.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting the CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting a track using the button
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
*
Symbol Function
CD/DVD player
CD changer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CD/DVD with compressed audio files*
Depending on the data, some letters and num-
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: Move
the controller to the left.
5. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
146
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off if the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic repeat*
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some
national-market versions only with the parking
brake applied.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South Amer-
ica, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0All regions
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
The Video menu is displayed:
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
*
Start playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
Reverse
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
148
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD changer*
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
Press button 2: the CD magazine 1 slides out.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from the
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid
touching the data side with its reflective CD
memory surface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer reads in the loaded CDs and is
then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter may jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD may jam and no longer
eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data-cre-
ation or recording processes, or poor quality or
old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
150
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -
may only be used for private purposes. Copying
of this technology is prohibited.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Storing music
Music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection in the vehi-
cle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC
formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan-
dard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software copyright 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc., for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo, the
logo typeface and the "powered by Gracenote"
logo are trade marks of Gracenote.
Storing from CDs/DVDs
Data can only be stored from CDs/DVDs on the
CD/DVD player.
1. Insert the CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence out of the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player as this will interrupt the storage process.
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD that have already
been stored can also be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Music collection
152
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove com-
partment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Data can only be stored from a USB
device via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Music, playing
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice*
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 22.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To select a track directly:
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one sentence.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
{Title …}
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Music collection
154
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later if
needed.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a directory and track
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played back.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played back.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing music from the USB device,
the existing music collection in the vehi-
cle is replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
External devices
156
External devices
AUX-IN port
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via
iDrive.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Via iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
Adjust volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
USB audio interface*/
additional connection of
music player in mobile
phone*
It is possible to connect external audio devices/
mobile phones. They can be operated on the
iDrive. The sound is played back on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3
player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones
that are supported by the USB audio inter-
face.
> Connection via snap-in adapter
*
, refer to
page 172; when equipped with an addi-
tional connection of the music player in the
mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile
phones. Playback is only possible if an
audio device/mobile phone is not con-
nected to the USB audio interface.
Due to the large number of different audio
devices/mobile phones available on the market,
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile
phones at your BMW center.
Audio files
The system can play back common audio files,
e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, as well
as playback lists in the M3U format.
Connecting via the USB audio interface
Lift up the center armrest.
Apple iPod/iPhone
To connect the device, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
from your BMW center. The cable adapter is
required for a flawless connection.
USB device
To connect the device, use a flexible
adapter cable to protect the USB inter-
face and your USB device against physical
damage.<
Connect the USB device to the USB audio
interface.
After connecting for the first time, the informa-
tion of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) and
the playback lists of the USB device are trans-
ferred to the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000
tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
The playback starts with the first track. When an
Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in
adapter and an audio device is connected to the
AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal
of the AUX-IN port is played.
Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name
Track search
You can call up the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up the tracks via the file directory.
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
External devices
158
> Information: type of music, artist, album,
track
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting a track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-
ist".
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" can be used to find specific entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed. Not all catego-
ries need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, call
up that artist only. All of the tracks by that
artist are then displayed.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
You can play back the tracks of the selected list
in random sequence, e.g. all tracks of an artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of the audio device. Other-
wise, the audio device can be damaged and the
resulting distraction can reduce road safety
while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Connecting instructions
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a current of max. 500 mA if this is sup-
ported by the device. Therefore, do not
connect the device to the power socket in
the vehicle.
> Do not force the plug into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice commands
and how to use BMW Assist or BMW
TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
162
Telephone
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the
buttons on the steering wheel or using voice
commands
*
.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is
automatically detected again with the engine
running or the ignition switched on as soon as
it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up
to four mobile phones can be stored simulta-
neously. If several mobile phones are detected
simultaneously, the respective last mobile
phone paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-
ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are
offered for.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when traffic conditions
allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile
phone in your hand while you are driving; use
the hands-free system instead. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones snap-in adapters are available
for. These mobile phones support the functions
described in this Owner's Manual with a certain
software version. Malfunctions can occur with
other mobile phones.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands
*
, refer to page 169
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: The mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. Information on this
subject is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
page 164, and on the mobile phone.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
163
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
> Depending on the mobile phone, certain
settings may be necessary on the mobile
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> For pairing, define a 4- to 16-digit number
of your choice as the Bluetooth Passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers better protection against unautho-
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required following successful pair-
ing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi-
cle stopped, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth"
5. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-
nect or pair under Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
> As soon as a mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the phone book entries stored
on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are
transmitted to your vehicle. This transmis-
sion is dependent on your mobile phone,
refer to the operating instructions of the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
164
mobile phone if necessary, and can take
several minutes.
> Four mobile phones can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Checking if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then
repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
> Repeat the pairing procedure.
> If all items on the list have been checked
and the mobile phone still cannot be paired,
please contact Customer Relations.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com-
puter.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
165
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev-
eral minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot under-
stand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full preparation
package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front vent outlets downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem.
Requirements
> The logon data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
166
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select this symbol to establish the con-
nection
or
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The phone number can also be entered using
voice commands
*
, refer to page 169.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Calls with multiple parties
You can switch between calls and connect two
calls to a single conference call. These func-
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
167
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this hand-
set.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.
Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts
*
and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a des-
tination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
168
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store in vehicle"
Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis-
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Dialing a number
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"
Messages
Different types of messages can be displayed:
> My Info messages from the BMW Assist
portal
> Messages from the BMW Concierge ser-
vice
Displaying messages
1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
169
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
My Info
To start destination guidance:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
Dial the number in the message:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired number.
2. "Call"
Messages from the concierge service
To use the address in destination guidance
*
:
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
To dial a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
To store the address:
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message"
Switching between the
mobile phone and hands-free
system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free
system when the motor is running or the igni-
tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile
phone, the system automatically changes over
to the hands-free mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
change over to the hands-free mode:
Depending on the mobile phone model used,
the conversation can be continued via the
hands-free system if necessary. Follow the
instructions displayed on the mobile phone dis-
play, refer to the operating instructions of your
mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the hands-free system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link, refer to page 164.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
> You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the
steering wheel.
> Most menu items on the Control Display
can be voiced as commands. The voice
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
170
activation system supports you by making
announcements and asking questions.
> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Requirements
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 165.
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Example: Dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting volume of instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
You say The voice control answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
For example {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue ?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
171
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, it is not possible to
use voice command either to call phone num-
bers stored in the mobile phone or to store new
numbers. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An
entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Creating and editing a voice phone
book
Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and a phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Listen to the entries and select:
You can have all entries in your voice phone
book read aloud in the order in which they were
entered and select a specific entry to establish a
connection:
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
{Redial}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
requested to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
172
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection. Use the SOS but-
ton
*
instead, refer to page 212.
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof
*
or
convertible top
*
closed to prevent interfer-
ence from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Inserting/removing the snap-
in adapter*
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
173
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged from
radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.
To conserve vehicle battery power, avoid
using the mobile phone when the ignition
is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Contacts
174
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
from the mobile phone
*
are displayed as well if
this function is supported by the mobile phone.
The addresses can be used as destinations for
navigation and the phone numbers can be
dialed.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-
gation system, it is only possible to
enter addresses that are contained in the
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.<
6. If applicable, "Store"
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as the home
address
A contact can be stored as the home address. It
is placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. Create a new contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as home address"
If the home address is deleted, only the content
of the home address entry is deleted and not
the entry itself.
My contacts
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone
*
.
Displaying contacts
"My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Displaying the detailed view*
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Selecting a contact as the navigation
destination
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone
*
may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con-
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be corrected to match
to the navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the con-
tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number*
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone
*
is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi-
cle, and only this copy is displayed.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
*
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
176
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request
*
is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys-
tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser-
vice will be available. The BMW Assist system
can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign-
ing a new contract.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Activation
must be completed.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Offered services
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection is established to
the BMW Assist Response Center. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic collision notification: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced roadside assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance
*
can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
time.
> BMW Customer Relations: connection with
Customer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW center, either automati-
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote door unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen vehicle recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
> In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers a concierge ser-
vice and information for route planning, traf-
fic and weather. A limited number of calls
can be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling, such as when
the mobile phone is not available or dis-
charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService*
TeleService supports communication with your
BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance
*
.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection costs may ensue.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> The engine is running.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, for example, res-
taurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas
stations or hotels, as well as receive the corre-
sponding telephone numbers and addresses.
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance
*
.
Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge service.
You are connected to the BMW Concierge ser-
vice to obtain the required information. You can
then have the phone number and address sent
to you and, for example, use it for destination
guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels
can be booked directly through the BMW Assist
concierge service. When an information mes-
sage is received, a list of the received messages
is displayed automatically. Open the message
via the message list, refer to page 168.
Roadside Assistance
You can call Roadside Assistance
*
of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone
*
is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
178
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by
Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.
TeleService Help*
BMW TeleService Help enables an in-depth
diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assis-
tance via wireless transmission. TeleService
Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside
Assistance and termination of the voice con-
nection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
Activating BMW Assist*
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
BMW Search is an online portal that makes cer-
tain services available for use in your vehicle,
e.g. information on restaurants along your
route.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser soft-
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront
is a trademark or registered trademark of
ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun-
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless net-
work coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
Using BMW Search
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact BMW Customer Relations for informa-
tion on all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to BMW Cus-
tomer Relations.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If the vehicle is equipped with the
mobile phone preparation package, a voice
connection is established.
Service Request*
At a glance
You can send a request to your BMW center to
arrange a service appointment. The TeleSer-
vice data are transmitted during the Service
Request. If possible, your BMW center will
establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
180
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
You can check when the BMW center was noti-
fied.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
This function can be called up via "Options".
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open any menu.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Service status"
5. "Available services"
Activating BMW Assist
If the services included in a BMW Assist sub-
scription are not displayed, they may need to be
activated.
"Activate BMW Assist"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics, including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
breakdown assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Refueling
184
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling;
otherwise no fuel can be filled into the
tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-
tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause
an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler flap.
Unlocking manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
release the fuel filler flap manually:
In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with
the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
and property damage.<
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling; otherwise this
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel-
vapor recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including approx.
4 US gal/15 liters reserve capacity.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
Closing
Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is
a clearly audible click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message
*
is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
185
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma-
nently damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has demonstrated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi-
tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for
sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels
containing up to and including 10% ethanol or
other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by
weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol
plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
problems relating to drivability and start-
ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under
certain environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
186
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct if necessary, including on the
spare wheel
*
: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. Otherwise, driving instability
or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can
result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 80, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 81.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph/
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column
of the table on the following pages and adjust
your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other-
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
187
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressures for M6 Coupe
Tire inflation pressures for M6 Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 100 V XL M+S 35/240 38/260 35/240 38/260 41/280 46/320
255/40 ZR 19 33/230 - 33/230 - 41/280 -
285/35 ZR 19 - 36/250 - 36/250 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 223.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 100 V XL M+S 35/240 38/260 35/240 38/260 41/280 46/320
255/40 ZR 19 32/220 - 32/220 - 41/280 -
285/35 ZR 19 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 223.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
188
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on
the sidewall:
DOT … 1009 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 10 of 2009.
BMW recommends replacing all tires at least
every 6 years, even if some tires may last for
10 years. This also concerns the tire of the
spare wheel
*
.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
For instance
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating
(not on ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in front of the R on ZR tires)
245/45 R 18 100 V
285/35
19
ZR
For instance
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1009
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
189
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for
winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.
For the sake of safety, new tires should be
installed.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-
ference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire
damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
190
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possi-
bly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. When selecting the tires, also ensure
that they have a sufficient load-carrying capac-
ity. If non-approved wheels and tires are used,
BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and
therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The right wheel-and-tire combination is
another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera-
tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS
and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 81. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Watch speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
After changing wheels/tires
After changing tires or wheels, the slip detec-
tion of the Sequential Manual Transmission
must become familiar with the changed state.
Reinitialize the system for this purpose:
1. Move the selector lever into the idling
position N on a straight stretch of road at a
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
191
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
speed between 20 mph/30 km/h and
90 mph/150 km/h.
2. Pull both shift paddles for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
If you do not carry out initialization, the system
will automatically learn the changed state grad-
ually during driving. This may be noticeable
from the clutch opening and closing briefly.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
BMW does not recommend moving the front
wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise
the handling characteristics may be impaired.
With tires of different makes and types
*
such a
change is not permissible.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-
mation.
Use is only permitted in pairs, with winter tires
of the size 245/45 R 18 on the rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf-
ficiently tensioned. Retighten as needed in
accordance with the chain manufacturer's
specifications.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
installing snow chains as this could cause
the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.
After mounting or removing snow chains, the
slip detection of the Sequential Manual Trans-
mission must become familiar with the altered
state. To do this, reinitialize the system, refer to
After changing wheels/tires, page 190.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
192
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training.
If you do not know what repair procedures to
follow, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood. Do
not open the hood until the engine has cooled
down.
You cannot start off with the hood open.<
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
193
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
2 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 196
3 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 213
4 Body ground/negative terminal
5 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 63
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The oil level can be displayed when the engine
is at operating temperature. Constant short-
distance driving or a very sporty driving style
can make it impossible for a measurement to be
taken.
Displays in instrument cluster
You can display the current oil level in the
instrument cluster.
1 Oil level
2 Maximum marking
3 Minimum marking
4 BC button
Press the button 4 in the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the display for the oil level
appears in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: the engine oil level
will be shown in the lower display.<
The oil level must be between the two marks.
A new measurement is automatically taken
after each engine start.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
194
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being determined.
This process can take approx. 1 minute
when stopped on a level surface and
approx. 5 minutes while driving.
If the engine oil has been topped off, the
measurement of the oil level can take up to
30 minutes.
3 Oil level at minimum:
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer to
Adding engine oil below. Add at least 0.5
US quart/liter of oil; otherwise, the oil level
check cannot reliably display the new oil
level.
If the oil level displayed is below minimum,
add engine oil immediately. Failure to do so
may lead to engine damage.
4 Oil level too high
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
5 No value can be determined at this time.
Engine is not yet at operating temperature.
Fast measurement
In addition to the automatic measurement, you
can also determine the current oil level manu-
ally, e.g. after adding engine oil, but with a lower
degree of measuring accuracy.
1. With the engine at operating temperature,
i.e. after at least 6 miles/10 km of uninter-
rupted driving, park the vehicle in a horizon-
tal position.
2. Allow the engine to run at idle.
3. Press the BC button on the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the oil level display is
shown in the instrument cluster.
4. Press the BC button for at least 2 seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
is displayed during the measurement.
5. After approx. 1 minute the current oil level is
displayed.
Displaying via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
195
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If the engine oil has been topped off, the
measurement of the oil level can take up to
30 minutes.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!":
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer also
to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level
displayed is below minimum, add engine oil
immediately. Failure to do so may lead to
engine damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked.":
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to Service requirements on page 68. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add oil until a value slightly above the
minimum of 0.0 US quarts/liters is displayed by
the oil level measurement. In this area a mes-
sage is also shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil; oth-
erwise, the engine may be damaged by adding
too much oil.
Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liter of oil; other-
wise, the oil level check cannot reliably display
the current oil level.<
Please conduct a fast measurement after
adding engine oil to check the oil quantity
added and to update the display.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to pre-
vent health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or
at a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives; under some cir-
cumstances, they can damage your
engine.<
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grade
10W-60.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
196
Alternative oil grades
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes.
Only use oils with the following specifications:
> Viscosity
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low temperatures
The oils used by BMW from the factory for your
M6 can be used at virtually any ambient tem-
perature. However, if the vehicle is operated for
a longer period at temperatures below –47/
–206, your BMW center will be happy to rec-
ommend a suitable oil.
Coolant
Do not open the cooling system when the
engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause
burns.<
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your
BMW center for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard.<
Always observe all applicable environ-
mental laws and regulations when dis-
posing of used coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the upper
end of the float rod is at the same height as
the upper edge of the filler neck, also refer
to the drawing next to the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until it clicks.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
197
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system
The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete center service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 68:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-
vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 70, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Maintenance
198
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located under a cover on the left
side of the driver's footwell, directly under the
instrument panel.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle emissions are raised. The
trip can be continued. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system will assume that
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If
the cap is then tightened, the display will go out
within a few days.<
Data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can
be transmitted or recorded to enable corre-
sponding services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
199
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Car-care products
Regular cleaning and care make a significant
contribution to retaining your BMW's value.
For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW
recommends using only products that BMW
has approved for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise you
about products and services for the cleaning
and care of your BMW.
Original BMW Care Products are materi-
als tested, laboratory tested, and tested in
actual use. They offer optimum care and pro-
tection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents; they can damage your vehi-
cle.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or pose health risks.
You should therefore heed the warnings and
hazard indications on the packaging. Open the
doors or windows on your vehicle whenever
cleaning the interior. Make sure there is suffi-
cient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only
products that are formulated for vehicle clean-
ing.<
Exterior care
Washing your vehicle
In the winter months, it is especially
important to ensure that the vehicle is
washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, signifi-
cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to
the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so
may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and
also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<
Car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes
because they can cause drops of water to
penetrate in the vicinity of the windshield.<
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the
following points:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 221.
> If necessary, fold in the outside rearview
mirrors, refer to page 49.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
> The convertible top must not be treated
with wax. Make sure that a program without
wax or a special convertible program is
available.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is a dan-
ger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Deactivate rain sensor to prevent unwanted
wiper activation.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil-
ers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
Sequential Manual Transmission
Before driving into the car wash, make sure the
vehicle is able to roll by making sure to:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Shift into transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 140 °F/606.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Care
200
Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or
temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or
can result in water penetration. Follow the oper-
ating instructions for the high-pressure clean-
ing jets.<
When using high-pressure cleaning jets,
do not remain in one place for a long time
and be sure to maintain a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm from sensors, e.g. Park Distance
Control sensors or radar sensors.<
Hand washing
When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty
of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the
vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a
washing brush.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<
Follow local guidelines for washing vehi-
cles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or
strong solvents to clean the covers.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with plenty of
water.
Use a window deicer to remove accumulated
ice and snow, not a scraper.
Windows
Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out-
side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur-
faces of the mirrors.
Do not use quartz-containing cleansers
to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<
Convertible top care
The appearance and service life of the convert-
ible top depend on proper care and operation.
Please follow these instructions:
> Never stow the convertible top in the con-
vertible top compartment when it is wet or
frozen, since this can cause water marks,
mildew stains, and scuff marks.
> If water marks do occur on the headliner,
remove them with a microfiber cloth and
interior cleanser.
> When parking for long intervals in enclosed
spaces, make sure there is sufficient venti-
lation.
> Remove bird droppings immediately
because their caustic properties have a cor-
rosive effect on the convertible top and can
damage the rubber seals.
Do not use stain remover, paint thinner,
solvents, gasoline, or the like to remove
stains. These substances can damage the rub-
ber coating. Improper care and cleaning can
cause leaks to develop in the convertible top
and its seams.<
In the event of more serious soiling, use a spe-
cial convertible top cleaner.
When doing so, follow the manufacturer's
directions for use.
After three to five washings, treat the convert-
ible top with sealant.
Caring for the vehicle finish
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
Regionally occurring environmental factors can
affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore
important to tailor the frequency and extent of
your car care accordingly.
Immediately remove particularly aggressive
substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease,
brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; other-
wise, they may damage your paint.
Repairing paint damage
Repair stone damage or scratches imme-
diately, depending on the severity of the
damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<
BMW recommends having paint damage pro-
fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish
materials in accordance with factory guidelines.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Waxing
Sealant is required when water no longer beads
on the clean surface of the paint. Use only prod-
ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax
to seal your finish.
Rubber gaskets
Treat only with water or a rubber care product.
To avoid noise or damage, do not use
products that contain silicone to care for
rubber gaskets.<
Chrome components
Particularly after exposure to road salt, thor-
oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door
handles, or window frames with plenty of water
with shampoo added to it. For additional treat-
ment, use chrome polish.
Alloy wheels
Depending on your system, braking can gener-
ate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels.
Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel
cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and
do not use steam cleaners at temperatures
greater than 140 °F/606, otherwise you may
damage your vehicle.<
Outside sensors
Sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such as
Park Distance Control sensors or radar sensors,
should be kept clean and free of ice to retain
their full function.
Interior care
Upholstery/fabrics
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order
to remove surface dirt.
In the event of more serious soiling such as bev-
erage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
microfiber cloth in combination with suitable
interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the
packaging.
Clean upholstery material over a large
area extending out to the seams. Avoid
intense friction.<
Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
items of clothing can cause damage to
the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro
fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather coverings
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight patterns in the
grain are part of the typical properties of a natu-
ral leather.<
Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and
folds and result in considerable wear and cause
the leather surface to become prematurely brit-
tle. We therefore suggest that you clean the
leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at
regular intervals.
Particularly with light-colored leather, make
sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater
tendency to become soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year with a leather
lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective
layer of the leather.
Carpets/cargo area
Carpeting, floor mats, and luggage compart-
ment rugs and paneling can be cleaned with a
vacuum or in the event of more serious soiling,
cleansed with an interior cleaner.
Floor mats and luggage compartment rugs can
be removed for cleaning. When inserting into
place, make sure that the seat rails do not pro-
trude over the floor mats; otherwise floor mats
can be damaged.
Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc-
tion process and can be removed by repeated
vacuuming.
Plastic components inside
Clean the glass cover of the instrument panel,
imitation leather surfaces, lamp lenses, and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Care
202
matte components with water and, if necessary,
a solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Fine wooden components
Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim
panels and components. Follow up by drying
with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Inside sensors
Clean inside sensors such as those of the High-
beam Assistant using a lint-free cloth moist-
ened with glass cleaner.
Displays
Clean displays like the radio or the Control Dis-
play using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft,
nonabrasive lint-free cloth.
Avoid using excessive pressure when
cleaning displays; otherwise, you could
damage them.<
Never use chemical-based cleansers or
household scouring products. Keep all
liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise
corrosion or damage to surfaces or electrical
components can occur.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs; they can dam-
age parts of the player.<
Storing your vehicle
When storing your vehicle for longer than three
months, please seek the advice of your BMW
center or a workshop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Coupe
Convertible
The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor mat.
Replacing wiper blades
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.
2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding
the wiper blade toward the front to disen-
gage it.
3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until
it is heard to engage.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the
specified procedures, have the corresponding
work carried out at your BMW center.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<
For information on how to care for the head-
lamps, please follow the instructions on
page 199.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
204
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times.
Have work on the xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
engine compartment.
35-watt bulb, H 8
1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab
and removing the cover cap upward.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Always wear gloves and eye protection –
the atmosphere inside the H8 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise there is a danger of inju-
ries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during
replacement.<
Side-mounted turn signals
5-watt bulb, WY5W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to the
rear, release the snap connection at the
front and take it off the trim strip.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Tail lamps
The roadside parking lamps, tail lamps,
brake lamps, and turn signals use LED
technology. The backup lamps are equipped
with long-life bulbs. Please contact a BMW cen-
ter in case of a malfunction.<
1 Turn signal
2 Roadside parking, tail and brake lamps
3 Reflector
4 Backup lamp
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
License plate lamps
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the
lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Repairing flat tire with
M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire, an M Mobility System is pro-
vided in the BMW M6. Using this system you
can apply a sealant in the inside of the tire, seal
off the damaged area, restore the tire inflation
pressure and then continue driving.
Safety measures in case of a breakdown:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on
the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and shift into first gear
or reverse with the manual transmission, or
move the selector lever into a drive position with
the sequential transmission. Have all vehicle
occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure
that they remain outside the immediate area in a
safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
If a warning triangle
*
or portable hazard warning
lamp
*
is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.<
Preparation
The M Mobility System is located in the cargo
area under the floor panel flap.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen-
etrated the tire if possible.
Corresponding information on using the
M Mobility System is also provided on the
device.<
Before using the M Mobility System,
observe the information on the sealant
bottle.<
Pull the sticker for the speed limit off the sealant
bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
Please observe the best-by date on the
sealant bottle.<
The M Mobility System consists of
1 Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit
2 Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
206
Model with pressure gauge on hose*
3 Connector and cable for lighter socket
4 Mounting for sealing bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/Off switch
7 Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8 Screw on pressure gauge for reducing tire
inflation pressure
9 Connecting hose for connecting compres-
sor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Model with pressure gauge integrated
in housing*
3 Connector and cable for lighter socket
4 Mounting for sealing bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/Off switch
7 Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8 Button for reducing tire inflation pressure
9 Connecting hose for connecting compres-
sor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored on underside of compressor.
Using M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill sealant into wheel, refer to page 206.
> Distribute sealant, refer to page 207.
> Produce tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 207.
Filling sealant into wheel
Strictly comply with the specified order,
otherwise highly pressurized sealant
could escape.<
1. Shake sealant bottle.
2. Screw hose 9 onto connection of sealant
bottle.
3. For model with pressure gauge on hose:
Make sure that screw 8 on pressure gauge
is closed.
4. Screw dust cap off valve of defective wheel
and screw filling hose 2 of sealant bottle
onto valve.
5. Insert sealant bottle on compressor hous-
ing so that it is positioned upright.
6. Make sure that the device is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into lighter socket in
vehicle interior, refer to page 104.
8. With the ignition switched on, refer to
page 55:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Switch on the device and allow to run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill wheel with sealant.
It is not important what inflation pressure
the tire has after filling.
9. Switch off device.
10. Remove connecting hose from connection
of sealant bottle and tire valve.
Stow the M Mobility System in the vehicle
again.
Distributing sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km so that
sealant is evenly distributed in tire.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
35 mph/60 km/h. Do not drop below
12 mph/20 km/h if possible.<
Producing tire inflation pressure
1. After approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at suitable
location.
2. Screw compressor hose 9 directly onto tire
valve.
3. Insert connector 3 in lighter socket in vehi-
cle interior.
4. Correct tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on:
> Increase inflation pressure: switch on
device, position I. To check currently set
inflation pressure, briefly switch off
device.
Do not allow compressor to run
longer than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may be dam-
aged.<
> Reduce inflation pressure: press
button 8 or turn screw 8 on pressure
gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not held, drive
the vehicle again, refer to Distributing
sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once.
Using the M Mobility System can be ineffective
with tire damage from a size of approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 213, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel if the tire can-
not be made ready for driving with the
M Mobility System.<
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. Otherwise do not con-
tinue driving.<
Continue driving
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise
accidents can occur.<
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
For details, refer to page 80.
Have the defective tire and the sealant bottle of
the M Mobility System replaced as soon as
possible.<
Changing wheels*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: Park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and shift into first gear
or reverse with the manual transmission, or
move the selector lever into a drive position with
the sequential transmission.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the imme-
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle
*
or portable hazard warning
lamp
*
is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
208
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com-
pleting work.
1 Chock
*
2 Vehicle jack
*
3 Lug wrench
*
The tools are located in the hollow of the spare
wheel.
Spare wheel*
1. Fold up the convertible top compartment
floor, refer to Convertible: increasing lug-
gage compartment capacity, page 33.
2. Pull back lock 1, fold open tensioning lock 2
completely and loosen the belt 3.
3. Remove the cover 4.
4. Take the tool mounting out of the spare
wheel.
5. Remove the spare wheel.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:
Place the chock behind the front wheel on
the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,
in front of this wheel. On steeply inclined
roads, always secure the vehicle against
rolling.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
The jacking points for the car jack are located in
the positions shown.
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-
face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or spare wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu-
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tight-
ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<
2. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamina-
tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
3. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 80, and the Sequential Manual Trans-
mission, refer to After changing wheels/
tires on page 190.
4. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Stowing wheel and tools
Convertible: a rear wheel can only be
transported with the convertible top com-
partment floor folded up.<
1. Lay the wheel in the tool mounting.
2. Lay the cover on the mounting.
3. Coupe: center the wheel and cover relative
to the lashing eyes 5.
Convertible: slide the wheel as far as possi-
ble to the left and to the rear.
4. Coupe: hook the belt into the lashing eyes 5
and lay it in the belt guide which runs in the
center of the lid.
Convertible: hook the belt into the lashing
eyes 5 and 7 and lay it in the belt guide of
the lid which runs offset.
5. Completely open the tensioning lock.
6. Thread the belt 3 through the axis 6 of the
tensioning lock without twisting it and ten-
sion it by hand.
7. Tighten the belt firmly with the tensioning
lock by opening and closing the lock several
times.
8. Fold the tensioning lock closed and stow
the protruding belt end.
Driving with spare wheel
With certain wheel-and-tire combinations
the size of the spare wheel differs from
that of the other wheels. The spare wheel is
equivalent to them in all load and speed ranges.
However, to restore the original state, the nor-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
210
mal wheel should be remounted as soon as
possible.<
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all
matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 213.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them a recycling
center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi-
tion for transport and storage. Always restrain
the battery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary power failure, e.g. due to
a discharged battery, the use of some equip-
ment will be restricted, requiring its reinitializa-
tion. In the same way, individual settings are lost
and must be updated again:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel
*
memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 45.
> Time and date
Must be updated again, refer to page 69.
> Radio
Radio stations need to be stored again,
refer to page 140.
> Navigation system
You must wait until the system becomes
functional again, refer to page 116.
> Power windows
The pinch prevention system for the power
windows must be reinitialized, refer to
page 36.
Talk to your BMW center before placing
the stored vehicle back in service. <
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
located in the compartment for the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 203.
Information on fuse allocation is located below
the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.
In glove compartment
1. Press the button on the back in the center of
partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,
arrow 2.
2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and
fold the lid 4 forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
In cargo area
Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and
remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.
Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional
fuses 2 are provided there.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
212
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 178.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The BMW Assist system is functional.
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an Emergency
Request is still possible when no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
Once your BMW Assist subscription expires,
the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by
a BMW center without you having to visit a
workshop. If the BMW Assist system has been
deactivated, Emergency Requests are not pos-
sible. The BMW Assist system can be reacti-
vated by a BMW center after signing a new con-
tract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
When the Emergency Request is received at
the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Assist Response Center contacts you and
arranges for additional steps to help you. Even if
you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center can take further steps to help
you under certain circumstances.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
In the event of a BMW Assist emergency call,
data that are used to determine the necessary
rescue measures, such as the current position
of your vehicle if it can be established, are trans-
mitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you, though.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by pressing the but-
ton.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side in the luggage compartment.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit is located in the filler element of
the rear seat backrest.
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Take out first aid kit.
To refit the filler element, insert the two
bottom tabs into the strip and press the
filler element back into place. Make sure that
you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
Roadside Assistance*
Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group offers
you assistance in the event of a breakdown
around the clock, including on weekends and
public holidays.
The phone numbers of Roadside Assistance in
your home country can be found in the Contact
brochure.
With BMW Assist you can contact Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 177.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
214
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW M6, the so-called jump-starting
terminal for jump starting in the engine com-
partment serves as a positive terminal for the
battery, also refer to engine compartment over-
view on page 193. The cover cap is marked with
a+.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-
starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a start-
ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.
Your BMW M6 has a special nut as body
ground or negative terminal.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit
mounted on the inside of the luggage compart-
ment under the floor mat, refer to page 203, and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
should always remain in the vehicle. It can be
screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
Only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-
ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do
not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise
damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can
occur.<
Access to screw thread
Front: press the arrow symbol on the cover in
the bumper.
Rear: press the arrow symbol on the cover while
prying out the cover upward by hand.
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 55, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. Do not tow the
vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise
the steering can turn to the left or right.When
the engine is stopped, there is no power assist.
This then requires increased effort for braking
and steering.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Make sure that selector lever position N is
engaged with the ignition switched on, as
otherwise the engine can be damaged during
towing.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
216
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
With tow truck
Do not tow the vehicle with only the front
or rear axle raised, as otherwise the
engine may be damaged or the steering can
turn to the left or right.<
Have the vehicle transported on a flatbed sur-
face only.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump start-
ing, refer to page 213. Vehicles equipped with a
catalytic converter should only be tow-started
when the engine is cold.
Manual transmission
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Tow-start in selector lever position N.
4. Move the selector lever into the drive posi-
tion and pull toward + within 2 seconds.
The correct gear will be selected and
engaged automatically.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice activation
system, and the index that will direct you as
quickly as possible to the information you are
looking for.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technical data
220
Technical data
Engine data
M6
Displacement cu in/cmμ 305.1/4,999
No. of cylinders 10
Maximum output hp 500
at engine speed rpm 7,750
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 383/520
at engine speed rpm 6,100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
221
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 41.0 ft/12.5 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technical data
222
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 41 ft/12.5 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
223
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
M6 Coupe M6 Convertible
Curb weight lbs./kg 3,909/1,773 4,398/1,995
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,850/2,200 5,247/2,380
Load lbs./kg 941/427 849/385
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,403/1,090 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,646/1,200 2,844/1,290
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300
> with raised convertible top compart-
ment floor, refer to page 33
cu ft/l – 12.4/350
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel grade: page 185
including reserve of: US gal/liters approx. 4/15
Window and headlamp washer
system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5 For more details: page 63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
224
Short commands of voice activation
system
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected. Here are the important short com-
mands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
*
Function Command
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Tone control {Tone}
Selecting the settings {Settings}
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
*
{Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
*
{Phonebook}
Opening BMW Assist
*
{B M W Assist}
Opening the home address
*
{Home address}
Opening destination entry
*
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
*
{Guidance}
Function Command
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD {C D and D V D}
CD and DVD menu {C D and D V D}
Selecting a DVD {D V D …}
Entertainment details on the split screen {Entertainment details}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
225
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Music collection
External devices
TV
Tone control
Radio
FM
AM
DAB
Function Command
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Calling up the TV {T V}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Calling up FM {F M}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
To select radio station {Station …} e.g. W-PLJ
Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
Function Command
Calling up AM {A M}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Function Command
To select radio station {Station …} e.g. W-PLJ
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
226
Weather Band
Satellite radio
Presets
Telephone
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Selecting the Weather Band {Weather band}
Switching on the Weather Band {Weather band on}
Selecting a Weather Band station {Select a weather channel}
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Satellite radio channel} e.g. channel 2
Function Command
Calling up the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
To start destination guidance {Start guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
227
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Map
Split screen settings
To end destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
To switch on voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
To switch off voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
To display address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Perspective map}
Automatic scaling of the map
*
{Map with automatic scaling}
To change scale {Map scale}
Scale ... feet
*
{Map scale ... feet} e.g. map scale 100 feet
Scale ... meters
*
{Map scale ... meters} e.g. map scale
100 meters
Scale ... kilometers
*
{Map scale ... kilometers} e.g. map scale
5kilometers
Scale ... miles
*
{Map scale ... miles} e.g. map scale 5 miles
Scale ... yards
*
{Map scale ... yards} e.g. map scale 100 yards
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen perspective {Split screen perspective}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
228
Contacts
BMW Assist
Vehicle information
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Split screen scale ... feet
*
{Split screen scale ... feet} e.g. split screen
scale 100 feet
Split screen scale ... meters
*
{Split screen scale ... meters} e.g. split screen
scale 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers
*
{Split screen scale ... kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale ... miles
*
{Split screen scale ... miles} e.g. split screen
scale 5 miles
Split screen scale ... yards
*
{Split screen scale ... yards} e.g. split screen
scale 100 yards
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Function Command
Function Command
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist {B M W Assist}
Opening BMW Search
*
{B M W Search}
Opening the Internet
*
{Internet}
Function Command
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings
Vehicle
Equipment
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Selecting the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Central screen settings {Control display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit {Limit}
Opening the light menu {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
Function Command
Selecting the air conditioning {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
230
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 76
– indicator lamp 78
Accessories 6
Accident, refer to Emergency
request 212
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 98
Activation times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 98
Active front head restraints 46
Adapter for spare key 26
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 83
Adaptive Light Control 90
Additional connection of
music player in mobile
phone 156
Additives
– coolant 196
– engine oil, refer to Approved
engine oils 195
Address, entering 117, 123
Address for navigation
– entering 117
Adjusting interior
temperature 95
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 136
Adjusting thigh support 44
Airbags 83
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 52
– indicator/warning lamp 85
– indicator lamp for front
passenger airbags 84
– sitting safely 43
Air distribution
– automatic 95
– manual 96
Airing, refer to Ventilation 97
Air outlets, refer to
Ventilation 97
Air recirculation, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 96
Air supply, automatic climate
control 94
Air volume 96
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 185
Alarm system 33
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 34
– interior motion sensor 34
– switching off alarm 33
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 34
– tilt alarm sensor 34
Albums of music
collection
153
Alloy wheels 201
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 190
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Antenna for mobile phone 162
Antifreeze
– coolant 196
– washer fluid 63
Antilock Brake System
ABS 76
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 33
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 223
Approved engine oils 195
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 223
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 102
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 67
Ashtray 104
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 76
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 96
Audio 136
– controls 136
– switching on/off 136
– tone control 136
– volume 136
Audio device, external 102
Automatic
– air distribution 95
– air volume 95
– cruise control 63
– headlamp control 89
– steering wheel
adjustment 45
Automatic climate control 94
– automatic air distribution 95
– convertible program 95
– parked car ventilation/
heating 98
– switching on and off 97
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 31
Automatic curb monitor 49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
231
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 89
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 90
– refer to Interior lamps 93
– refer to Pathway lighting 90
– refer to Welcome lamps 89
Automatic lights
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 91
Automatic Service
Request 180
Automatic soft closing 31
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 95
AUX-IN connection 102
AUX-IN port 156
Available services 180
Average fuel consumption 67
– setting units 68
Avoiding highways for
navigation 126
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 34
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 223
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Backrests, refer to Seats 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 204
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 213
Bass, refer to Tone
control 136
Battery
– jump starting 213
– refer to Vehicle battery 210
Battery replacement, remote
control for Comfort
Access 36
BC button, refer to
Computer 66
Being towed 215
Belts, refer to Safety belts 48
Beverage holder, refer to
Cupholders 103
Blower, refer to Air volume 96
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 164
BMW
– Car Shampoo 202
BMW Assist,
activating 178, 180
BMW Assist 176
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 197
BMW Search 178
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to
Cupholders 103
Bracket for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 172
Brake assistant 76
Brake force display 83
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 204
– two-stage 83
Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely 109
Brake rotors
– breaking-in 108
– refer to Braking safely 109
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 76
– brake force display 83
– breaking-in 108
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 76
– electronic brake-force
distribution 76
– parking brake 57
– refer to Braking safely
109
Brake system 108
– brake pads 108
– brake rotors 109
– breaking-in 108
– warning lamp 13, 78
Braking safely 109
Breakdown
– M Mobility System 205
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 213
Breaking-in brake pads 108
Breaking-in the clutch 108
Breaking-in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 108
Break-in period 108
Brightness of Control
Display 74
Button for starting engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 55
Buttons on steering wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
Call
– accepting 165
– ending 166
– rejecting 166
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 166
Can holder, refer to
Cupholders 103
Capacities 223
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
232
Care 199
– car-care products 199
– carpets 201
– car washes 199
– CD/DVD player 202
– chrome components 201
– convertible top 200
– displays 202
– exterior 199
– fine wooden
components 202
– hand washing 200
– headlamps 200
– high-pressure cleaning
jets 199
– interior 201
– leather 201
– light-alloy wheels 201
– paint 200
– plastic components 201
– rubber gaskets 201
– safety belts 202
– sensors and cameras 202
– upholstery and cloth-
covered paneling 201
– windows 200
Cargo area
– capacity 223
– emergency release 32
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 32
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 32
– opening with remote
control 29
Caring for the vehicle
finish 200
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 162
Car radio, refer to Radio 139
Car Shampoo 202
Car washes 199
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 109
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 76
CBS Condition Based
Service 197
CD, audio playback 144
CD changer 144, 148
– controls 136
– fast forward/reverse 146
– filling or emptying the
magazine 148
– random sequence 145
– selecting a track 144
– switching on/off 136
– tone control 136
– volume 136
CD player 144
– controls 136
– fast forward/reverse 146
– random sequence 145
– selecting a track 144
– switching on/off 136
– tone control 136
– volume 136
Center armrest, adjusting
height 102
Center console 14
Central locking
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Central locking system 27
– Comfort Access 34
– hotel function 31
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing language on
Control Display 73
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 68
Changing wheels 189, 207
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 193
CHECK button 71
Check Control 70
Check Gas Cap 184
Checking air pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 186
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 53
Child restraint systems 52
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 52
Chock 208
Chrome-plated parts 202
Chrome polish 202
Cigarette lighter 104
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 104
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 199
Clock 66
– 12h/24h format 70
– setting time 69
– setting time and date 70
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Closing fuel filler cap 184
Clothes hooks, Coupe 103
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 56
Comfort Access 34
– replacing battery, remote
control 35
Comfort access 34
Comfort program of EDC 79
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 103
Computer 66
– clock 66
– displays on Control
Display 67
Concierge service 177
Condensation, refer to When
vehicle is parked 110
Condition Based Service
CBS 197
Confirmation signals for
locking and unlocking 29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
233
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 104
Consumption display, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 67
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 67
Contacts
– creating 174
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 74
– switching off/on 19
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convenient closing
– windows, with Comfort
Access with Coupe 35
– with Comfort Access 35
Convenient opening and
closing
– convertible top 28, 30
– windows 28, 30
Convertible
– convertible program for
automatic climate control 95
– opening and closing
windows 36
– rollover protection
system 85
– top 38
– wind deflector 41
Convertible top
– closing manually 39
– convenient opening and
closing 30
– emergency closing 39
– opening and closing 38
Convertible top care 200
Coolant 196
– checking level 196
– temperature 65
Cooling, maximum 96
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 196
Cooling function, automatic
climate control 96
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 196
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 76
Country codes DVD 146
Country of destination for
navigation 117
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 93
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 102
Cruise control
63
Cruising range 67
Cupholders 15, 103
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 223
Current playback
– external devices 158
– of music collection 153
Customer Relations 179
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 220
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data, technical 220
– dimensions 221
– engine 220
– weights 223
Data transfer 180
Date
– date format 70
– setting 70
Daytime running lamps 90
– replacing bulbs 204
Defect
– door lock 30
– luggage compartment lid 32
– tires, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 79
– tires, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
Defrosting windows 96
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 96
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 96
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 96
Destination address
– entering 117, 123
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 121
Destination for navigation
– entering via map 122
– entering via voice 123
– entry 117
Destination guidance 126
– bypassing route
sections 127
– changing specified
route 126
– continuing 126
– starting 126
– voice instructions 127
– volume of voice
instructions 128
Detour, selecting 131
Digital clock 66
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 140
Dimensions
– Convertible 222
– Coupe 221
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 61
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 127
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 127
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 119
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 220
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display elements, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
234
Displays
– on Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-up Display 86
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with Comfort Access 36
– coolant 196
– vehicle battery 210
Distance, refer to
Computer 67
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 67
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 75
Door entry lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 93
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Door lock 29
Doors
– manual operation 30
– remote control 28
DOT Quality Grades 188
Draft-free ventilation 97
Drinks holder, refer to
Cupholders 103
Drivelogic 50, 59
Drive-off assistant, refer to
Starting off on uphill
slopes 78
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 89
Driving programs, refer to
Drivelogic 59
Driving stability control
systems 76
Driving through water 109
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 108
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 96
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 96
DSC 51
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 76
– indicator lamp 13, 76
– malfunction 78
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
– indicator lamp 13
DVD
– country codes 146
– settings 147
– video playback 146
DVD menu 147
DVD player, refer to CD
player
144
DVD video 146
Dynamic destination
guidance 127
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 76
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 76
E
Easy entry, refer to Entering
rear 47
Easy entry/exit 50
EDC 51
EDC Electronic Damping
Control 79
Eject button, refer to Buttons
in area of the CD/DVD
player 136
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 39
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 184
– luggage compartment lid 32
– storage compartment, hotel
function 31
Electric convertible top 38
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 50
Electronic brake-force
distribution 76
Electronic Damping Control
EDC 79
– Comfort program 79
– Normal program 79
– Sport program 79
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 39
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 184
– hotel function 31
– luggage compartment lid 32
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
cargo area 32
Emergency request 212
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 213
Engine
– breaking-in 108
– data 220
– M Engine Dynamic
Control 60
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 65
– speed 220
– starting 56
– starting, Comfort Access 34
– switching off 56
Engine compartment 193
Engine coolant 196
Engine oil
– adding 195
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 195
– approved oils 195
– checking oil level 193
– fast measurement
194
– interval between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 68
– oil change 195
– oil grades, refer to Approved
engine oils 195
– possible displays 194
– recommended oils 195
– temperature 66
– temperature gauge 66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
235
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 220
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 65
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 220
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 56
Entering destination via town/
city name 117
Entering rear 47
Entering zip code for
navigation 118
Entertainment sound output
on/off 136
Entry map for destination 122
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 137
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 76
Event Data Recorders 198
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 109
Exterior mirrors 49
– adjusting 49
– automatic dimming
feature 50
– automatic heating 49
– folding in and out 49
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 49
External audio device 102
External devices
– random sequence 158
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 214
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 70
False alarm
– refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 34
– refer to Switching off
alarm 33
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 48
Fastest route for
navigation 126
Fast forward
– CD changer 146
– CD player 146
Filler neck for washer fluid 63
Filling bottle, refer to
M Mobility System 205
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 98
First aid, refer to First aid
kit 213
First aid kit 213
Flashing
– during locking/unlocking,
refer to Setting confirmation
signals 29
– triple turn signal
activation 61
Flat tire
– Flat Tire Monitor 79
– M Mobility System 205
– run-flat tires 82
– spare wheel 208
– Tire Pressure Monitor 81
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
– warning lamp 81, 82
Flat Tire Monitor 79
– false alarms 80
– initializing system 80
– snow chains 191
– system limits 80
– warning lamp 81
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 63
FM, waveband 139
Folding into raised position
convertible top
compartment floor,
Convertible 33
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 93
For your own safety 5
Free memory capacity, music
collection 154
Front airbags 83
Front passenger airbags
– deactivating 84
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 79
Fuel
– average consumption 67
– display 66
– fuel specifications
185
– high-quality brands 185
– quality 185
– specifications 185
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 223
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Fuel filler flap 184
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 184
Fuses 210
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 100
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 67
– refer to Fuel
specifications 185
– refer to Required fuel 185
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Gas station
recommendations 127
Gear changes 59
Gear display, refer to Displays
in instrument cluster 59
Gearshift lever
– manual transmission 57
General driving notes 108
Glass sunroof, electric with tilt
function
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 35
Glove compartment 101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
236
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 116
Grills, refer to Ventilation 97
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 223
Ground clearance 108
H
Handbrake
– indicator lamp 13, 57
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hand washing 200
Hazard warning flashers 15
HD Radio 140
Head airbags 83
Headlamp
– cleaning tank, refer to
Capacities 223
Headlamp control,
automatic 89
Headlamp flasher 61
Headlamps
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 62
– filler neck for washer
fluid 193
– replacing bulbs 203
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 90
Head restraints
– active front head
restraints 46
– front 46
– sitting safely 43
Head-up Display 51, 86
– default view 87
– M view 87
– shift lights 60
Heated
– mirrors 49
– rear window 96
– seats 48
– steering wheel 50
Heating 95
– exterior mirrors 49
– interior 94
– rear window 96
– residual heat 97
– seats 48
– steering wheel 50
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual heat 97
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 111
Height, refer to
Dimensions 221
Height adjustment
– seats 44
– steering wheel 50
High-beam Assistant 91
High beams 91
– headlamp flasher 91
– indicator lamp 13
High-pressure cleaning
jets 199, 200
High water, refer to Driving
through water 109
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 126
Hills 109
Holder for cups 103
Homepage of BMW 4
Hood 192
Horn 10
Hotel function 31
– unlocking manually 31
Hot exhaust system 109
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 76
Hydroplaning 109
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 140
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 66
Identification mark
– recommended tire
brands 190
– tire coding 188
Idle 58
iDrive 16
– changing date and time 70
– changing language 73
– changing settings 73
– changing units of measure
and display type 68
– controller 16
– controls 16
– operating principle 17
– setting brightness 74
– start menu 17
– status information 19
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 55
Ignition lock 55
– starting engine with Comfort
Access 35
Impressum 2
Imprint 2
Indicator/warning lamps
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 78
– airbags 85
– brake system 78
– DSC 13, 76
– DTC 13
– Flat Tire Monitor 81
– MDrive 13, 50
– M Dynamic Mode 13, 77
– parking brake 13, 57
– parking lamps/low beams 13
– safety belt warning 48
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 82
Indicator and warning lamps
– overview 13
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 186
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 80
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 140
– refer to Power failure 210
– refer to Setting time and
date 70
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 127
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 93
Instrument lighting 93
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument panel, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 100
Interactive map 122
Interior lamps 93
– switching on with remote
control 28
Interior motion sensor 34
– switching off 34
Interior rearview mirror,
automatic dimming
feature 50
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 62
Intersection, entering for
navigation 118
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 156
iPod, connecting, refer to USB
audio interface 156
J
Jacking points 208
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 213
Jump starting 213
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
Access 34
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 34
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Keys 26
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– spare key 26
Kickdown, refer to Drive
mode 59
Knee airbags 83
Knock control 185
L
Lamps
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 91
– refer to Parking lamps/low
beams 89
Lamps and bulbs 203
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 111
Last destinations 120
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 53
Leather care 201
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 203
Length, refer to
Dimensions 221
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 205
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 203
Lighter 104
Lighting
– instruments 93
– lamps and bulbs 203
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 89
Light switch 89
Loading
– securing cargo 111
– stowing cargo 111
– vehicle 110
Loading, refer to Cargo
loading 110
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 111
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 31
Locking 28
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 31
– from outside 28
– without key, refer to Comfort
Access 34
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Low beams 89
– automatic 89
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 204
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Lug bolts 208
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 209
– wrench 208
Luggage compartment
– hotel function 31
– increasing capacity,
Convertible 33
Luggage compartment lid 31
– emergency operation 32
– emergency release 32
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 32
– opening with remote
control 29, 32
– unlocking manually 32
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
– Comfort Access 35
Lumbar support 44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
238
M
MDynamic Mode MDM76
– indicator lamp 13, 77
M Engine Dynamic Control 60
M Mobility System 205
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 190
Maintenance 197
– refer to Service
requirements 68
Maintenance system 197
Malfunction
– convertible top 39
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 184
– hotel function 31
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 70
Managing music 154
Manual air distribution 96
Manual operation
– convertible top 39
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 184
– hotel function 31
– luggage compartment lid 32
Manual transmission 57
– tow-starting 216
Map display 128
Map for navigation
– changing scale 129
– destination entry 122
Map view facing north 128
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Maximum cooling 96
Maximum speed with winter
tires 190
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 76
MDrive 50, 77
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions
– Convertible 222
– Coupe 221
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 168
Messages from the concierge
service 169
Microfilter 98
Microphone
– for telephone 14
– for voice activation
system 14
Mirror dimming feature
50
Mirrors 49
– automatic curb monitor 49
– folding in and out 49
– heating 49
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 165
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 162
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
– operation via iDrive 165
– pairing 162
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 162
Mobile phone battery 173
Mobility System 205
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 79
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port 156
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB audio interface 156
Multi-channel playback 137
Multi-function steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 61
– refer to Wiper system 62
Music, playing 152
Music collection 151
– backup 155
– deleting 155
– random sequence 154
– restoring 155
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 156
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB audio
interface 156
Music search 152
M View 86
M view 87
MW, waveband 139
My Info 169
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 119
– storing current position 119
– voice activation 123
Navigation data 116
Navigation destination
– entering manually 117
– home address 120
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Navigation system 116
– address book 119
– bypassing route
sections 127
– continuing destination
guidance 126
– destination entry 117
– dynamic destination
guidance 127
– entering a destination
manually 117
– entering destination via
voice 123
– frequently asked
questions 132
– gas station
recommendations 127
– planning a trip 124
– route list 127
– selecting destination via
map 122
– selecting route criteria 126
– special destinations 120
– starting destination
guidance 126
– terminating destination
guidance 126
– traffic bulletins 129
– voice instructions 127
– volume adjustment 128
Neck support, refer to Front
head restraints 46
New remote control 26
New wheels and tires 189
Normal program of EDC 79
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 63
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 214
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnostics
interface 198
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 185
Odometer 65
Oil, refer to Engine oil 193
Oil change intervals
– refer to Service
requirements 68
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 203
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– using remote control 28
– using the door lock 29
Operating principle, iDrive 17
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 220
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 96
Outside temperature display
– changing unit of measure 68
– in computer 68
Overview
– operating principle 17
– radio control 136
P
P 400 program 60
P 500 program 61
P 500 Sport program 61
Panic mode 29
Park Distance Control PDC 75
Parked car heating, refer to
Parked car ventilation/
heating 98
Parked car ventilation 98
– switching on and off
directly 98
Parked car ventilation system
– LED 94
Parking
– vehicle 56
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 75
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 75
Parking brake 57
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 57
Parking lamps 89
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 204
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 49
Pathway lighting 90
PDC Park Distance Control 75
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 165
Phone numbers
– dialing 166
Pinch protection system of
power windows 37
Plasters, refer to First aid
kit 213
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Polish 202
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 98
POWER 51
POWER, refer to M Engine
Dynamic Control 60
Power failure 210
Power windows, refer to
Windows 36
Pressure, tires 186
– producing with M Mobility
System 205
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system of
windows 37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
240
R
Radio
– controls 136
– HD Radio 140
– satellite radio 142
– selecting waveband 139
– storing stations 140
– switching on/off 136
– tone control 136
– volume 136
– weatherband, refer to
Weather news flashes 141
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 55
Radio readiness 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
– with Comfort Access 35
Rain sensor, windshield wiper
system 62
Random sequence
– external devices 158
– music collection 154
Reading lamps 93
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 204
Rearview mirrors, refer to
Mirrors 49
Rear window
– heating 96
– opening and closing 37
Reception
– quality 140
– radio stations 140
Recirculated-air mode, refer
to AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 96
Recirculation of air, refer to
AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 96
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 43
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 204
Refueling 184
Releasing
– hood 192
Releasing the locks, refer to
Unlocking 35
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 67
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 67
Remote control 26
– Comfort Access 34
– garage door opener 100
– luggage compartment lid 29
– malfunction 29, 35
– replacing battery 35
Removing condensation on
the windows 96
Replacement fuses 210
Replacement of tires
– refer to Changing
wheels 207
Replacement remote control,
refer to New remote
controls 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 203
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 189
Reporting safety defects 7
Required fuel 185
Reserve
– warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 138
Residual heat 97
Restraint systems
– for children 52
– refer to Safety belts 48
Retreaded tires 190
Reverse
– CD changer 146
– CD player 146
Reverse gear 58
– manual transmission 57
Road map 128
Roadside
Assistance 177, 213
Roadside parking lamps 91
– replacing bulbs, refer to
Parking lamps 204
Rollover protection system on
Convertible 85
– lowering 85
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 214
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 126, 127
– bypassing sections 127
– changing 126, 127
– changing criteria 126
– displaying map view 128
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 127
– selecting 126
Route information, refer to
Destination guidance with
voice instructions 127
Route map, refer to Displaying
map view 128
Route selection 126
Run-flat tires
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 82
– flat tire 82
– tire replacement 189
S
Safety belts 48
– damage 48
– indicator lamp 48
– reminder 48
– sitting safely 43
Safety belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 48
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 76
– airbags 83
– driving stability control
systems 76
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 85
– safety belts 48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Satellite radio 142
– enabling or disabling
channel 142
– selecting channel 143
– storing channel 143
Scale for navigation,
changing 129
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 215
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 142
Seats 43
– adjusting backrest width 44
– adjusting the seats 44
– heating 48
– lumbar support 44
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
– sitting safely 43
– storing the setting 45
– thigh support 44
Section of route, altering 127
Securing cargo 111
– ski bag 105
Selecting route 126
Selection options with
navigation system 126
Selector lever 58
– Sequential Manual
Transmission 58
Selector lever lock, refer to
Shiftlock 58
Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
– Drivelogic driving
programs 59
– Drive mode 59
– idle 58
– initializing system, refer to
After changing wheels/
tires 190
– kickdown 59
– reverse gear 58
– Sequential mode 58
– shift lights 60
– shiftlock 58
– towing 215
– tow-starting 216
Sequential mode 58
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 213
Service Interval Display
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 197
– refer to Service
requirements 68
Service Request 179
Service requirements 68
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 197
Services status 180
Setting button, refer to
Controls, controller 16
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 73
– clock, 12h/24h mode 70
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 50
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– DVD 147
– language 73
Settings for the map view 129
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 98
Shifting 59
Shifting into drive position,
refer to Selector lever
positions 58
Shift lights 60
Shiftlock 58
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 59
Shock absorber control, refer
to EDC Electronic Damping
Control 79
Short commands of voice
activation system 224
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 126
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 145
– CD player 145
Side airbags 83
Side-mounted turn signals,
replacing bulbs 204
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sill panel lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 93
Sitting safely 43
– with airbags 43
– with head restraint 43
– with safety belts 43
Ski bag 104
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting off on uphill
slopes 78
SMG, refer to Sequential
Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 104
Snap-in adapter
– mounting/removing 172
– using 162
Snow chains 191
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 104
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 198
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 55
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
242
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 212
Spare
– adapter for spare key 26
– fuses 210
– key 26
– wheel, driving with spare
wheel 209
– wheel, refer to Changing
wheels 207
Special destinations 120
Special destinations,
displaying 122
Special destinations, entering
by name 121
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 195
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 195
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 72
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 137
Speed with winter tires 190
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 20
Sport program of EDC 79
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 76
Start/Stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 56
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 213
Starting difficulties, refer to
Jump starting 213
Starting off
– clutch protection with
manual transmission 79
– on a slippery surface 79
– on uphill slopes 78
Start menu 17
Station, refer to Radio 139
Station, selecting
– radio 139
Stationary ventilation
– preselecting activation
times 98
Status information on Control
Display 19
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam cleaners 199, 200
Steering wheel
– adjustment 50
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Easy entry/exit 50
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 45
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 50
– lock, refer to Ignition lock 55
– MDrive button 50
– memory 45
– shift paddles 59
Storage compartments 103
Stored trip, calling up 125
Storing 202
Storing a destination in the
address book 119
Storing music 151
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Storing tires 191
Storing your vehicle 202
Street, entering for
navigation 118
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 186
Surround 137
SVCD 146
SW, waveband 139
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching automatically
between high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam Assistant 91
Switching automatically
between high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam assistant 91
Switching off
– engine 56
Switching on
– audio 136
– CD changer 136
– CD player 136
– radio 136
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 90
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
T
Tachometer 65
Tail lamps 204
– replacing bulbs 204
Tank capacity
– also refer to Capacities 223
– fuel tank capacity 184
Target cursor for
navigation 122
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 220
– capacities 223
– dimensions 221
Telephone 162
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– voice commands 169
TeleService 176
TeleService Diagnosis 178
TeleService Help 178
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 97
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 95
– changing unit of measure 68
– refer to Coolant
temperature 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Temperature display
– outside temperature 65
– outside temperature
warning 66
– setting the units 68
Temperature gauge
– engine oil 66
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 63
The individual vehicle 5
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 209
Tilt alarm sensor 34
– switching off 34
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 49
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 98
Tire inflation pressure 186
Tire pressure
– loss 81
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81
Tire Quality Grading 188
Tire replacement
– new wheels and tires 189
Tires
– age 188
– air loss 81, 82
– breaking-in 108
– condition 189
– damage 189
– inflation pressure 186
– minimum tread depth 189
– M Mobility System 205
– new wheels and tires 189
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 79
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor 81
– replacing 189
– retreaded tires 190
– size 187
– size, refer to The right
wheels and tires 190
– wear indicators 189
– wheel/tire combination 189
– winter tires 190
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 129
Tone
– control 136
– middle setting 138
Tone on locking/unlocking 29
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 203
Top 38
Top 50 of music
collection
153
Torque
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 209
– refer to Engine data 220
Tow bar 215
Tow fitting 214
Towing 214
– methods 215
– tow fittings 214
– with manual
transmission 215
Town/city, for navigation 117
Tow rope 215
Tow-starting 214
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
– resetting system 81
– system limits 81
– warning lamp 82
Tracks
– selecting with CD 144
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 76
Traffic bulletins
– categories 131
Traffic bulletins, filtering 131
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 129
– refer to Bypassing route
sections 127
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 131
– during destination
guidance 131
Traffic information with
navigation 129
Transmission
– breaking-in 108
– Drivelogic 59
– Drive mode 59
– drive-off assistant, refer to
Starting off on uphill
slopes 78
– idle 58
– kickdown, refer to Drive
mode 59
– manual transmission 57
– reverse gear 58
– Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
– Sequential mode 58
– shift lights 60
– towing 215
– tow-starting 216
Transporting children
safely 52
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 111
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 189
Trip, deleting 125
Trip, storing 124
Trip-distance counter
– refer to Trip meter 65
Trip meter 65
Trip odometer, refer to Trip
meter 65
Trips, changing 125
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 32
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 31
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 221
Turn signals 61
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
244
Units
– average fuel
consumption 68
– temperature 68
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 100
Universal remote control, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 100
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– setting unlocking
behavior 28
– without key, refer to Comfort
Access 34
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort Access 34
Updating the navigation
data 116
Upshift display, refer to Shift
lights 60
USB audio interface 156
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 210
– refer to Replacing battery 36
Using turn signals 61
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 209
VCD 146
Vehicle
– battery 210
– breaking-in 108
– identification number 193
– loading 110
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 221
– parking 56
– weights 223
Vehicle care, refer to Care 199
Vehicle jack 208
– jacking points 208
Ventilation 97
– draft-free 97
– for cooling 97
– while stationary 98
Venting
– refer to Ventilation 97
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 94
Vents, refer to Ventilation 97
Video menu 147
Video playback 146
Viscosity 195
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 127
Voice activation system
– overview 22
– short commands 224
Voice commands
– telephone 169
Voice instructions for
navigation system 127
– repeating 128
– switching on/off 127
– volume 128
Voice phone book 171
Volume 136
– audio sources 136
– cargo area 223
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 223
– mobile phone 165
– voice instructions 128
– windshield cleaning system,
refer to Capacities 223
Volume balance, tone
setting 137
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 70
Warning triangle 213
Washer fluid
– capacity of the reservoir 63
– wiper system 63
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 109
Water penetration 199, 200
Waveband for radio 139
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 189
Weather news flashes 141
Website BMW 4
Weights 223
Welcome lamps 89
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 189
Wheel/tire damage 189
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 221
Wheels and tires 186
Width, refer to
Dimensions 221
Wind deflector 41
Windows 36
– Convenient closing with
Comfort Access 35
– convenient opening and
closing 28, 30
– opening and closing,
Convertible 36
– opening and closing,
Coupe 36
– rear window, Convertible 37
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 62
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 96
– displays, refer to Head-up
Display 86
Windshield wash
– automatic, refer to Rain
sensor 62
– capacities, reservoir 223
– filler neck for washer
fluid 193
– nozzles 63
– washer fluid 63
– wiper system 62
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 62
– wiper blade
replacement 203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Winter tires 190
– setting speed limit 72
– storage 191
Wiper blades
– replacement 203
Wiper system 62
– rain sensor 62
– washer fluid 63
– windshield washer
nozzles 63
Word matching principle for
navigation 125
Working in the engine
compartment 192
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard vehicle tool
kit 203
X
Xenon lamps 204
– replacing bulbs 204
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to MDrive 50
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
01 41 2 602 735 Ue
*BL260273500Z*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 735 - © 08/09 BMW AG
